JP2021141983A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To efficiently perform processing when a counting switch is operated.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided, including: a main control board for controlling the progress of games; a board for controlling the number of game media which has an area for storing the number of game media, the area capable of storing the number of game media; and a counting switch to be operated when the game media stored in the board for controlling the number of game media are to be paid back. The board for controlling the number of game media determines whether or not the counting switch is operated (S703). If the board for controlling the number of game media determines that the counting switch is operated, the number of game media stored in the area for storing the number of game media is determined (S704). If the number of game media stored in the area for storing the number of game media is not determined to be "0 (zero)", counting processing (processing after S705) is to be performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines (“medalless gaming machines”, “managed gaming machines”, “enclosed” that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of using physical (as a tangible object) medal as the gaming value (game medium). It is known as a "type game machine" or the like (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-062558

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to appropriately perform information processing of the game value in a game machine that uses electronic information as the game value.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown). The invention according to the initial claim of the present application corresponds to the initial invention 13 among the initial inventions 1 to 13 described later.
The present invention
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
A game medium number control board (100) having a game medium number storage area capable of storing the number of game media, and a game medium number control board (100).
It is equipped with a counting switch (47) that is operated when refunding the game media stored in the game medium number control board.
The game medium number control board determines whether or not the counting switch has been operated, and when it is determined that the counting switch has been operated, determines the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage area. When it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage area is not "0", the counting process can be executed.

According to the present invention, information processing of game value can be appropriately executed.

In the first embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the slot machine which is an example of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the power supply path in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the power supply path in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the command (main control command) transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the command (the payout control command) transmitted from the payout control board to the main control board in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the command (management apparatus command) transmitted from the management apparatus to the payout control board in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the command (game machine command) transmitted from the payout control board to a management device in 1st Embodiment. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the processing flow of the main routine in the payout control board. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control command analysis processing in step S110 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control command analysis processing in step S110 of FIG. 8, and is the flowchart which follows FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the lending process in step S119 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the counting process in step S117 of FIG. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the processing flow of the main routine in the main control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the power-on processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the setting change processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of 3 bet processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1 bet processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game start processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game end processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the payout process in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the return process in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the power-on processing in a payout control board and a management device. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the lending process in a payout control board and a management device. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the counting process in a payout control board and a management apparatus. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the counting process in a payout control board and a management apparatus, and is the flowchart which follows FIG. In the first embodiment, it is a figure which shows the waveform of the data signal and the strobe signal of serial communication between a payout control board and a management device. In the first embodiment, it is a timing chart which shows on / off of each signal at the time of lending an electronic medal. In the first embodiment, it is a timing chart which shows on / off of each signal at the time of electronic medal counting (refund). In the second embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of a gaming machine. In the second embodiment, it is a figure explaining the telegram between a gaming machine and a rental unit. In the second embodiment, it is a figure explaining game machine performance information, game machine installation information, hall control / fraud monitoring information. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart showing a basic communication sequence. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the example 1 of the activation sequence (when the gaming machine is activated first). In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows Example 2 of the activation sequence (when the lending unit is activated first). In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the basic sequence of game machine information notification. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the count notification sequence. It is a flowchart which shows the counting process in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart showing a lending notification sequence. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows the gaming machine information notification timer and the gaming machine information notification request flag. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the update sequence of the gaming machine information notification timer. In the second embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the game machine information management.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
The “game value (game medium)” refers to a medium used for a game, and is “electronic information (electronic medal)” in the present embodiment.
Further, "electronic information (electronic medal)" means that when money (banknotes) is inserted into the management device (CR unit) 200, it is converted into electronic information according to the amount of money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played. It is possible to credit the gaming machine as a gaming value for playing the game on the machine.

Furthermore, the "management device (CR unit) 200" is a device for managing the lending and refund of electronic information as a game value, which is provided for each game machine and is adjacent to the game machine. Is placed. In the hall, the management device 200 is called a sand because it is arranged between the gaming machines. Further, a "game system" is configured from the game machine and the management device 200 corresponding to the game machine.
Further, "rental" means transferring electronic information as a game value from the management device 200 to the game machine and crediting the inside of the game machine.

Further, "counting" means returning the electronic information as the game value credited inside the game machine to the management device 200. When the counting switch 47 is operated, the electronic information as the game value credited inside the game machine is returned to the management device 200. At this time, the number of credits becomes "0", and the electronic information managed by the management device 200 is added accordingly.
Furthermore, "credit" means storing electronic information as a game value inside the game machine.
Further, "bet" means betting electronic information as a game value in order to play a game. When the bet switch 40 is operated, electronic information as a credited game value is bet.

The "specified number" means the number of bets that can start (execute) a game in the game.
In addition, "payout" means adding electronic information as a number of game values according to the payout of the winning combination to the number of credits based on the winning combination.
Furthermore, the "bet medal" refers to electronic information as a game value bet for playing a game.
Further, the "storage medal" refers to electronic information as a credited (stored) game value.

Further, the "storage bet" means that by operating the bet switch 40, a part or all of the electronic information as the game value credited to the inside of the game machine is placed within the range where the bet can be made in the game. Bet to play a game.
Furthermore, "automatic betting" means that when a replay wins a prize, electronic information as a game value of the number bet in the previous game is automatically bet by the control process of the slot machine 10 as a game machine. To say.

Further, "cancellation" means to return the electronic information (bet medal) as the bet game value to the credit by operating the cancel switch 46. When the cancel switch 46 is operated, the electronic information as the bet game value is returned to the credit. At this time, the number of bet medals becomes "0", which is added to the number of credits.
Further, "return" means to store electronic information as a game value stored inside the management device 200 in a card (magnetic card, IC card, etc.) and eject the card from the card reader / writer 205. say. When the return switch 203 is operated, electronic information is stored in the card and discharged from the card reader / writer 205.

Further, when the game progresses with the "N-1" game, the "N" game, the "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N". When it is a game, the game of the "N" game is referred to as "this time game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as a "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N + 1" game is referred to as the "next game".

In the present specification, a numerical value in which "(B)" is added to the end of a number (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)" at the end of the number means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is expressed as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the ending symbols of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted, respectively. ..

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First Embodiment>
The slot machine 10, which is an example of the gaming machine in the first embodiment, uses electronic information (electronic medals) as the gaming value (game medium) without using physical medals (as tangible objects). be. Therefore, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment does not include a medal insertion slot, a medal selector, a medal payout device, and the like.

Further, in the first embodiment, the management device (CR unit) 200 is arranged adjacent to the slot machine 10, and further, the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 are connected so as to be communicable in both directions. There is. Then, the electronic medals can be transferred between the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 by communication, and in the slot machine 10, the game can be executed using the electronic medals transferred from the management device 200. ing.

FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 1 shows a management device (CR unit) 200 and a hall computer 300 together with a slot machine 10.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes a main control board 50, a sub control board 80, and a payout control board 100 (credit number management board) as typical control boards.

In FIG. 1, the solid line portion is a communication line indicating data exchange, and the direction of the arrow indicates the direction in which data flows. For example, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are formed so as to be communicable in both directions. On the other hand, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 communicate in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (it does not mean that only those shown in FIG. 1 are provided). ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via the input port 51 or the output port 52. There is.
The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as a motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub control board 80).

Further, the RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game and the like.
Furthermore, the ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.
Further, the main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC having an arithmetic function) provided on the main control board 50, executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs arithmetic, and the like. The drive control of the reel 31 and the payout at the time of winning are executed.

Further, on the main control board 50, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted. The RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
The MPU including the RWM83, ROM84, and subCPU85 is also mounted on the sub-control board 80, which will be described later. The RWM83 and ROM84 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a cancel switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. , And a counting switch 47.
The bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and the cancel switch 46 are electrically connected to the main control board 50, and the counting switch 47 is the main control board. Instead of 50, it is electrically connected to the payout control board 100 (credit number management board) described later.

Here, the "operation switch (or simply" switch ")" switches the electric signal on / off based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receives an external force). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and / or an electric component), and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.
When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, the light from the light emitting element continues to be incident on the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect the light, the operation switch is in the off state). Then, when the operation switch (operation body) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light emitting element is not incident on the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electric signal indicating that the operation switch is turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is off, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, it turns on. You may.

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 has a lever (rod) shape (hence, also referred to as a “start lever (switch) 41”), a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a cancel switch 46. , The operating body of the counting switch 47 is in the shape of a push button (for this reason, "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", "cancel button (switch) 46", "counting". Button (switch) 47 ").

Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided in the operating body of the operation switch and / or in the vicinity or the vicinity thereof. Then, when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the permitted state, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the disallowed state, for example, the operation switch of the operation switch By emitting red light from the LED or the like, the player is shown the permission / non-permission state of the operation switch.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting an electronic medal credited inside the slot machine 10 for the game this time.
In the present embodiment, as the bet switch 40, a 1-bet switch 40a for betting one electronic medal in one operation and three (maximum number, specified number) electronic medals are bet in one operation. It is equipped with a 3-bet switch 40b for the operation.
It should be noted that only one bet switch 40 is provided, and by operating this bet switch 40 once, three (maximum number, specified number) electronic medals among the credited electronic medals are bet. May be good.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right) (starting the rotation of the reels 31).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped. ..

Further, the cancel switch 46 is an operation switch operated by the player when returning the bet electronic medal (bet medal) to the credit.
When the cancel switch 46 is operated, the bet electronic medal is returned to the credit. At this time, the number of bets becomes "0", and the amount is added to the number of credits. For example, if the cancel switch 46 is operated in a situation where three electronic medals are bet, the number of bets changes from "3" to "0", and "3" is added to the number of credits.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on / off.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is operated when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.
When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on.
Further, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on in the state where the power switch 11 is turned off (the state where the power is turned off) and the power switch 11 is turned on in this state, the setting is being changed, that is, the setting change mode is set.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on while the power switch 11 is on, the setting is being confirmed, that is, the setting confirmation mode is set.

The setting switch 13 is a switch that is operated when changing the set value.
Every time the setting switch 13 is operated once while the setting is being changed, the set value is added by "1".
In the present embodiment, the set value has settings 1 to 6, and during the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the set value changes from "1" to "2" → ... → It switches from "6" to "1" to ...
While the setting is being changed, one of the set values is displayed on a predetermined display device, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is confirmed.

The reset switch 14 is a switch that is operated when the RWM 53 is initialized or when an error is cleared.
When the power switch 11 is turned on with the reset switch 14 turned on, the initialization process is performed and the predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
Further, when the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 14 is operated (on), the error is cleared.

Further, the main control board 50 outputs an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal plate 190 from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as a hall computer 300 or a data counter installed in a hall) via an external centralized terminal plate 190.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the hall computer 300 via an external centralized terminal plate 190. Then, a signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the external centralized terminal board 190 in one direction, and a signal is transmitted from the external centralized terminal board 190 to the hall computer 300 in one direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes an acquired number display LED 78 and a credit number display LED 76 as a number display device.
The acquired number display LED 78 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and the credit number display LED 76 is electrically connected to the payout control board 100 (credit number management board) described later instead of the main control board 50. It is connected.
The acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of electronic medals paid out (the number of acquired players) when a winning combination is won, and is composed of two upper and lower digits.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no electronic medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as "0".

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the number of electronic medals paid out (acquired number), but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order) in a game that notifies the push order during AT.
Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the number of payouts (acquired number), the error content, and the push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
During AT, the advantageous push order notification is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control board 80.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a motor 32 (stepping motor in this embodiment) of the symbol display device and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 for displaying a symbol (three in this embodiment), a motor 32 for driving each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65.
Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a symbol combination corresponding to the combination) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33.

The reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.
Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected. Further, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, the number of pulses of the (stepping) motor 32 must be driven to stop the symbol ahead of the symbol on the effective line, counting from the symbol on the reference position. Can be identified.

When the player starts the game, the player bets the credited electronic medal by operating the bet switch 40. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of electronic medals of the game bet, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means), and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31 to rotate. By rotating the reel 31 by the motor 32 in this way, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by operating the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42).
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the lottery result (result determined by the internal lottery means) of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed. Then, the game result of this game is displayed by the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops at the valid line (when the winning combination is won), the electronic medal corresponding to the winning winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.
The winning combination lottery means 61 draws (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the Fukuei Law Regulations (rules concerning certification of gaming machines and type verification, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"). The lottery result by the combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as an "internal lottery means 61" in terms of rules.

When the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device that can be operated in the game is determined. In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
The combination lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generation means for lottery (hardware random number or the like), a random number extraction means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extraction means. It is equipped with a winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined region (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that the counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec keeps counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and is a random number while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keep counting.
The random number extraction means extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (on) by the player.
The winning number determining means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with the lottery table.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all the combinations. Then, when any of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). The winning combination may be a case where there is one winning combination (single winning) or a case where there are a plurality of winning combinations (duplicate winning).

The reel control means 65 starts the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when the rotation start command of the reels 31 is received, particularly when the operation (ON) of the start switch 41 is detected in the present embodiment. Control to.
Further, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in this game after the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. Is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation (ON) of the stop switch 42 is detected. The motor 32 is driven and controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, the reel control means 65 enables a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is turned on) within the range of stop control of the reel 31 in a game in which at least one winning flag is on. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning combination with the winning flag turned off) on the effective line.
Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation (the number of moving symbols (frames)) of the reel 31. Means within range.

In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations in one minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for the predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) in which the MB is operating. Is set to. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation.
On the other hand, for the predetermined reel 31 in which the MB is operating, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for the predetermined reel 31 in which the MB is operating, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. The symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop at the predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is stopped before the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, it is controlled so that the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is stopped at a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number stops at the effective line, when the reel 31 is stopped, the reel 31 By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, it is controlled so that the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of roles are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority of the winning combination is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the pull-in stop control of the symbol related to the highest priority combination is performed according to a predetermined priority.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reel 31 stopped on the effective line is a symbol combination corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped at the effective line. Specifically, from the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that stops the reel 31 on the effective line before actually stopping is set in advance. Judgment is made, or the symbol combination stopped at the effective line after the reel 31 is stopped is judged in advance.

When the winning determination means 66 determines that the symbol combination stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the symbol combination corresponding to any combination, the payout means 67 determines that the combination is won. The process of adding the number of electronic medals according to the winning combination to the number of credits is performed.
Further, the payout means 67 controls to automatically insert (automatic bet) the number of electronic medals inserted in the game this time without adding the electronic medals to the number of credits at the time of winning the replay.

The main control board 50 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
As control commands, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, information regarding the lottery result of the winning combination (result determined by the internal lottery), and the stop switch 42 are operated. Information on the time, information on the winning role, etc. can be mentioned.

The sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, and the like of the effect (information) during the game and the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 50 is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by serial communication, and information (control) necessary for output of the effect is obtained. Command) is sent.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to serial communication, but may be parallel communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The following peripheral devices for effect such as the effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for production are not limited to these.

The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data or the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing various data and the like when a lottery related to the production is performed as the production data.
Further, the sub CPU 85 refers to a CPU (IC having a calculation function) provided on the sub control board 80, and executes, calculates, and the like a program necessary for outputting an effect during a game and a game standby.

Further, the effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect lamp 21 lights or blinks in a predetermined pattern, respectively.
The effect lamp 21 is a back lamp and reel 31 that are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols that can be seen from the display window) from behind. Includes a fluorescent lamp that illuminates the design on the reel 31 from the top, a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won.
Furthermore, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.

Further, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effects images (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the condition device operating in the game, etc.) during the game, etc. , Game information (number of games played, number of acquired games, etc. when the character is operating or during the advantageous section (AT)) and the like are displayed.
Further, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes the effect output control means 91. Then, the effect output control means 91 determines what kind of effect is to be output at what timing based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, and based on this determination, the effect output control means 91 is used for the effect. Control to output various effects from peripheral devices.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes a payout control board 100 (credit number management board).
Further, the payout control board 100 manages the number of credits for electronic medals.
Here, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are electrically connected to each other so that bidirectional communication is possible.
The main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means.
Further, in both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection, serial communication may be used, parallel communication may be used, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

The payout control board 100 includes an input port 101, an output port 102, an RWM 103, a ROM 104, a credit number management CPU 105, and the like, similarly to the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.
Further, the payout control board 100 is external to the main control board 50, the counting switch 47 as the operation switch, the credit number display LED 76 as the number display device, and the slot machine 10 via the input port 101 or the output port 102. The management device (CR unit) 200 and the like are electrically connected.

The RWM 103 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data or the like captured when the credit number management CPU 105 manages the number of credits.
Further, the ROM 104 is a storage medium for storing a program for managing the number of credits, various data, and the like.
Further, the credit number management CPU 105 refers to a CPU (IC having a calculation function) provided on the payout control board 100, and executes, calculates, and the like a program necessary for managing the number of credits.

Further, the counting switch 47 is an operation switch operated by the player when returning the electronic medal credited inside the slot machine 10 to the management device 200.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, the electronic medal credited inside the slot machine 10 is returned to the management device 200. At this time, the number of credits becomes "0", and the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200 is added accordingly.
For example, when 100 electronic medals are credited inside the slot machine 10, the number of credits changes from "100" to "0" when the counting switch 47 is operated, and the electronic medals managed by the management device 200. "100" is added to the number of sheets.

Further, for example, when the cancel switch 46 is operated in a situation where three electronic medals are bet and 100 electronic medals are credited, the bet electronic medals are returned to the credits. At this time, the number of bets changes from "3" to "0" and the number of credits changes from "100" to "103". After that, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the number of credits changes from "103" to "0", and "103" is added to the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player stops the game, if there is an electronic medal bet, first, the cancel switch 46 is operated to return the bet electronic medal to the credit, and then. Then, the counting switch 47 is operated to return the credited electronic medal to the management device 200.

However, when the replay wins in the previous game and the number of electronic medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet, even if the cancel switch 46 is operated, the automatically bet electronic medals cannot be returned to the credit. Is set to. That is, the automatically bet electronic medal is set so that it cannot be returned to the credit even if the cancel switch 46 is operated.
Both the electronic medal bet based on the operation of the bet switch 40 and the electronic medal automatically bet based on the replay winning may be returned to the credit by operating the cancel switch 46.

Further, the bet electronic medal and the credited electronic medal may be returned to the management device 200 by operating the counting switch 47.
For example, when three electronic medals are bet and 100 electronic medals are credited, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the bet electronic medals and the credited electronic medals are transferred to the management device 200. The number of bets and the number of credits may be set to "0", and "103" may be added to the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200.
In this case, the cancel switch 46 may or may not be provided.

Further, the credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of electronic medals credited inside the slot machine 10.
In this embodiment, up to 10,000 electronic medals can be credited. That is, the upper limit of the number of credits is set to "10000". Therefore, the credit number display LED 76 is composed of five digits.
The upper limit of the number of credits is not limited to "10000", and may be, for example, "15000", "30,000", or "50,000".
Further, the number of digits of the credit number display LED 76 is not limited to 5 digits, and can be appropriately set according to the upper limit of the number of credits.

Further, it is possible to transmit an enable signal from the payout control board 100 to the main control board 50. The main control board 50 is set so that various processes can be executed when the enable signal is on, and a predetermined process cannot be executed when the enable signal is off.
In the present embodiment, when the credit number reaches the upper limit value, that is, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 reaches "10000", the enable signal is turned off. Then, when the enable signal is turned off, the main control board 50 controls so that the operations of the bet switch 40 and the start switch 41 cannot be accepted.
The enable signal may be turned off when the number of credits reaches "15,000", "30,000", or "50,000".

Further, for example, a normal game and a special game (1BB game; first-class big bonus game; operation of a first-class accessory continuous operation device) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game can be executed, and the normal game can be executed. When the game shifts to the special game, it may be stopped at the end of the special game so that the game cannot proceed. That is, it may have a stop function. In addition, the conditions for stopping the game are not limited to the end of the special game, and can be set as appropriate. Then, the enable signal may be turned off when the condition for stopping is satisfied.

In this case, a stop presence / absence setting switch for setting (switching) whether the stop function is enabled (with stop) or disabled (without stop) can be provided. Further, a stop release switch for releasing the stop can be provided. Then, when the condition for stopping is satisfied, by operating the stop release switch, the stop can be released, the game can proceed, and the enable signal can be turned on. Further, the stop release switch can also be used as another switch such as the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14.

Further, the credit number management CPU 105 of the payout control board 100 includes a credit number management means 111. Then, the credit number management means 111 manages (adds or subtracts) the number of credits based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the control command transmitted from the management device 200, and the operation of the counting switch 47. At the same time, the display of the number of credits on the credit number display LED 76 is controlled.

The management device (CR unit) 200 is a device for managing the lending and refund of electronic medals. One management device 200 is installed for each slot machine 10. In the hall, the management device 200 is referred to as a sand because it is arranged between the slot machines 10. Further, one gaming system is configured from the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 corresponding to the slot machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 are electrically connected to each other so that bidirectional communication is possible.
The payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are connected via a terminal board for renting a game ball or the like.
Further, the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means.
Furthermore, in both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection, serial communication may be used, parallel communication may be used, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the payout control board 100 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main control board 50 and is also capable of bidirectional communication with the management device 200. ..
Then, the electronic medals can be transferred (rented) from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 by communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, and the rented electronic medals can be credited to the payout control board 100. It is said that.

Further, by communication between the payout control board 100 and the main control board 50, it is possible to bet an electronic medal credited on the payout control board 100 and execute a game, and when a winning combination is won, the payout electronic medals are made possible. It is said that medals can be credited to the payout control board 100.
Further, when the player quits the game, the electronic medals credited to the payout control board 100 can be transferred (refunded) to the management device 200 by communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100. There is.

As shown in FIG. 1, the management device 200 includes a bill insertion slot 201, a lending switch 202, a return switch 203, a frequency display unit 204, a card reader / writer 205, and the like.
The bill slot 201 is a bill slot for inserting bills (for example, 1000-yen bills) necessary for lending electronic medals.
When the bill inserted into the management device 200 is correctly recognized from the bill insertion slot 201, the frequency corresponding to the inserted bill is displayed on the frequency display unit 204. The frequency display unit 204 is composed of, for example, a 3-digit 7-segment display. For example, when a 1,000-yen note is inserted, "10" is displayed as the frequency, and when a 10,000-yen note is inserted, "100" is displayed as the frequency.

The lending switch 202 is a switch operated by the player when lending an electronic medal, provided that the remaining frequency is displayed on the frequency display unit 204.
For example, each time the lending switch 202 is pressed, the electronic medal corresponding to the frequency "10" can be lent.
Here, for example, when a 1000-yen bill is inserted into the management device 200 from the bill insertion slot 201, the frequency displayed on the frequency display unit 204 is "10", and the number of electronic medals lent out per frequency "1". Is five. In this case, if the lending switch 202 is operated when the display of the frequency display unit 204 is "10", 50 electronic medals are lent out. Then, by communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, the rented 50 electronic medals are credited to the payout control board 100.

The number of electronic medals credited to the payout control board 100 is displayed on the credit number display LED 76. For example, if 50 electronic medals are lent out when the number of credits is "0", the display of the credit number display LED76 changes from "0" to "50".
As described above, in the present embodiment, the physical (as a tangible object) medal is not lent to the player, and the rented electronic medal is managed by the communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100. The device 200 is transferred to the payout control board 100 and credited.

The return switch 203 is a switch operated by the player when the game is stopped.
When the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10 is operated, the electronic medal is returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device. Then, when the return switch 203 of the management device 200 is operated, the number of electronic medals returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 and the number of electronic medals corresponding to the frequencies displayed on the frequency display unit 204 are electronic data. Is stored in a card (magnetic card, IC card, etc.), and the card is ejected from the ejection port of the card reader / writer 205.

For example, it is assumed that the frequency "10" (corresponding to 50 electronic medals) is displayed on the frequency display unit 204 of the management device 200. Further, it is assumed that 150 electronic medals are returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 by operating the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10. At this time, when the return switch 203 of the management device 200 is operated, electronic data corresponding to 200 electronic medals is stored in the card and discharged from the discharge port of the card reader / writer 205.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the management device 200 is electrically connected to the hall computer 300. Then, the management device 200 transmits information regarding lending and refunding of electronic medals to the hall computer 300 in one direction.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a power supply path.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a power supply board 150. Further, the power storage board 150 is equipped with the storage capacitor 151, and the payout control board 100 is also mounted with the storage capacitor 106.
Furthermore, the power supply board 150 and the main control board 50 are connected by a harness A161, and power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 through the harness A161.

Further, the power supply board 150 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness C163, and power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 through the harness C163.
Electric power is supplied to the power supply board 150 from the outside by alternating current. Then, the power supply board 150 converts alternating current into direct current to supply electric power to the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
Further, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness B162, and through the harness B162, the main control board 50 is connected to the payout control board 100, or the payout control board 100 is connected to the main control board 50. It is said that it can supply electric power.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness D164, and commands can be bidirectionally communicated between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 through the harness D164. Has been done.
The payout control board 100 is a control board that manages the number of credits of electronic medals, and its stability greatly affects the interests of the player. Therefore, power is directly supplied from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 through the harness C163. I have to.

When the harness C163 is cut off, electric power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 via the harness A161, the main control board 50, and the harness B162.
Furthermore, the payout control board 100 is equipped with a capacitor 106 for storing electricity, and when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted, the payout control board 100 can be supplied with power from the capacitor 106.

Further, when the harness A161 and the harness C163 are cut off, power can be supplied from the capacitor 106 to the payout control board 100, and power can be supplied from the payout control board 100 to the main control board 50 through the harness B162. There is.
As described above, in Example 1, a capacitor 106 for a backup power supply is mounted on the payout control board 100, and even if the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted due to disconnection of the harness A161 or the harness C163, the payout is performed. The control board 100 and the main control board 50 are driven so that the processing at the time of power failure can be reliably executed so as not to cause a disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the power supply path.
As shown in FIG. 3, in Example 2, the power supply board 150 is not mounted with a capacitor, and the payout control board 100 is mounted with a capacitor A107 and a capacitor B108 for storing electricity.
Further, the power supply board 150 and the main control board 50 are connected by a harness E165, and power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 through the harness E165.

Furthermore, the power supply board 150 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness G167, and it is possible to supply electric power from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 through the harness G167.
Further, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness F166, and through the harness F166, the main control board 50 is connected to the payout control board 100, or the payout control board 100 is connected to the main control board 50. It is said that it can supply electric power.

Further, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness H168, and commands can be bidirectionally communicated between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 through the harness H168. ing.
When the harness G167 is cut off, electric power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 via the harness E165, the main control board 50, and the harness F166.

Further, the payout control board 100 is equipped with a capacitor A107 and a capacitor B108 for storing electricity, and when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted, the power can be supplied to the payout control board 100 from the capacitor A107 and the capacitor B108. It is said that.
Further, when the harness E165 and the harness G167 are cut off, the power can be supplied from the capacitor A107 and the capacitor B108 to the payout control board 100, and the power can be supplied from the capacitor A107 to the main control board 50 through the harness F166. There is.

Also in Example 2, when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted, power is supplied to the payout control board 100 and the main control board 50 from the backup power supply capacitor mounted on the payout control board 100. It is the same as 1.
However, in Example 2, the capacitor B108 is used as a backup power source dedicated to the payout control board 100. As a result, even if the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted due to disconnection of the harness E165 or the harness G167, the payout control board 100 that manages the number of credits of the electronic medals is surely driven, and when the power is cut off. This process is ensured so that the player is not disadvantaged.

In Example 2, it is preferable to set the electric capacity of the capacitor B108 to be larger than the electric capacity of the capacitor A107. As a result, the backup power can be reliably supplied to the payout control board 100, which greatly affects the interests of the player, and the processing at the time of power failure can be reliably executed.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, the program on the payout control board 100 is set to stop before the program on the main control board 50.
Further, in the present embodiment, the program on the payout control board 100 is set to start before the program on the main control board 50 when the power is restored from the power failure.

4 to 7 are diagrams showing a list of commands.
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the main control board 50. be.
Further, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100, and FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the management device 200. be.

Here, the commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 are collectively referred to as "main control commands".
Further, the commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the main control board 50 are collectively referred to as "payout control commands".
Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the management device 200 are collectively referred to as "game machine commands".
Further, the commands transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 are collectively referred to as "management device commands".

In the present embodiment, the main control command, the payout control command, the gaming machine command, and the management device command are all composed of 16-bit (2 bytes) data.
Further, the main control command, the payout control command, the game machine command, and the management device command are all composed of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a succeeding command (lower 8 bits).
That is, one main control command, payout control command, game machine command, and management device command are composed of 16-bit (2-byte) data consisting of a preceding command and a succeeding command.
The preceding command is data indicating the type of command, and the succeeding command is data indicating parameters (variables).
Then, in the present embodiment, commands are transmitted and received by serial communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.

In FIGS. 4 to 7, the data in the "preceding" column indicates the preceding command (upper 8 bits), and the data in the "subsequent" column indicates the succeeding command (lower 8 bits). Further, both the preceding command and the succeeding command are represented by hexadecimal numbers.
As the main control command, eight types of commands described in the “content” column in FIG. 4 can be mentioned. Further, among these eight types of commands, the setting change start command, the setting change end command, the game start + RT state command, and the game end + game state command are collectively referred to as "game information command". Furthermore, the input request command, the payout request command, and the return request command are collectively referred to as an "operation request command".

As the payout control command, 12 types of commands described in the “content” column in FIG. 5 can be mentioned. Further, the ACK response of the input request command is also referred to as an "input repeat command", and the NAK response of the input request command is also referred to as a "non-input command". Similarly, the ACK response of the payout request command, the NAK response, the ACK response of the return request command, and the NAK response are "payout repeat command", "non-payable command", "return repeat command", and "non-returnable command", respectively. Also called. Furthermore, the NAK response at the time of abnormality is also referred to as an "error command".

As the management device command, five types of commands described in the “content” column in FIG. 6 can be mentioned. Further, the ACK response of the lower count request command is also referred to as a "lower count repeat command", and the ACK response of the upper count request command is also referred to as a "upper count repeat command".
As the game machine command, 13 types of commands described in the “content” column in FIG. 7 can be mentioned. The ACK response of the lending request command is also referred to as a “lending repeat command”.

In FIG. 4, the start confirmation command is a command for confirming whether or not the communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 is normal on the main control board 50 side, and is the main command when the power is turned on. This is a command transmitted from the control board 50 to the payout control board 100.
The main control board 50 transmits a start confirmation command to the payout control board 100 when the power is turned on. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the start confirmation command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the start confirmation command shown in FIG. 5).
Then, on the main control board 50 side, the transmitted start confirmation command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, so that it can be determined that the communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 is normal. ..

Further, as described above, when the power is turned off, the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped before the program on the main control board 50, and when returning from the power off, the program is paid out before the program on the main control board 50. The program on the control board 100 starts.
Here, when the power is turned on, that is, when the power is restored from the power failure, the main control board 50 sends a start confirmation command to the payout control board 100, but the program on the payout control board 100 starts first. , The startup confirmation command can be received reliably. Then, when the main control board 50 determines that the communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 is normal by sending back the transmitted start confirmation command from the payout control board 100 as it is, the subsequent processing Is set to proceed.

In FIG. 4, the setting change start command is a command for transmitting the transition to the setting change mode to the payout control board 100 side, and is a command from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 at the time of transition to the setting change mode. This is the command sent to. Further, the subsequent "01H" indicates that the setting key switch 12 is in the ON state.
The main control board 50 transmits a setting change start command to the payout control board 100 at the time of transition to the setting change mode. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the setting change start command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the setting change start command shown in FIG. 5), and further, the setting change is also made to the management device 200. A start command is sent (Fig. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits a setting change start command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

As a result, it can be determined that the payout control board 100 side has shifted to the setting change mode. Further, on the main control board 50 side, it can be determined that the transmission to the setting change mode can be transmitted to the payout control board 100 by sending back the transmitted setting change start command as it is from the payout control board 100. Further, it can be determined that the management device 200 has shifted to the setting change mode.

In FIG. 4, the setting change end command is a command for transmitting the end of the setting change mode to the payout control board 100 side, and is a command from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 at the end of the setting change mode. Is the command sent. Further, the subsequent "00H" indicates that the setting key switch 12 is in the off state.
The main control board 50 transmits a setting change end command to the payout control board 100 at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the setting change end command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the setting change end command shown in FIG. 5), and further, the setting change is also made to the management device 200. Send the end command (Fig. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits a setting change end command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

As a result, on the payout control board 100 side, it can be determined that the setting change mode has ended. Further, on the main control board 50 side, it can be determined that the end of the setting change mode can be transmitted to the payout control board 100 by sending back the transmitted setting change end command as it is from the payout control board 100. Further, the management device 200 can also determine that the setting change mode has ended.

In FIG. 4, the game start + RT state command is a command for transmitting the start of the game and the RT state to the payout control board 100 side, and the payout control board 100 is sent from the main control board 50 when the start switch 41 is turned on. This is the command sent to.
When the start switch 41 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a game start + RT state command to the payout control board 100. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the game start + RT state command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (the game start + RT state command ACK response shown in FIG. 5), and also to the management device 200. The game start + RT status command is transmitted (Fig. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits a game start + RT state command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

Thereby, on the payout control board 100 side, it is possible to determine that the game has started and the RT state. Further, on the main control board 50 side, it can be determined that the game start and RT state can be transmitted to the payout control board 100 by sending back the transmitted game start + RT state command as it is from the payout control board 100. Further, the management device 200 can also determine that the game has started and the RT state.

In FIG. 4, the game end + game state command is a command for transmitting the game end and the game state to the payout control board 100 side, and corresponds to the third stop switch 42 (corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last). This is a command transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the stop switch 42) is turned from on to off.
The main control board 50 transmits a game end + game status command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off (the player releases his hand from the third stop switch 42). do. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the game end + game state command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (game end + game state command ACK response shown in FIG. 5), and further, to the management device 200. However, the game end + game status command is transmitted (Fig. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits a game end + game state command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

As a result, on the payout control board 100 side, it is possible to determine that the game has ended and the game state. Further, on the main control board 50 side, it can be determined that the game end and the game state can be transmitted to the payout control board 100 by sending back the transmitted game end + game state command as it is from the payout control board 100. Further, the management device 200 can also determine that the game has ended and the game state.

In FIG. 4, the input request command is a command that requests the payout control board 100 to subtract the number of bets from the number of credits, and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the bet switch 40 is turned on. It is a command.
Further, the subsequent command of the input request command indicates the number of bets (the number of requests to be subtracted from the number of credits based on the operation of the bet switch 40).

In the present embodiment, when the 1-bet switch 40a is turned on, the main control board 50 requests the payout control board 100 to subtract the bet number "1" from the credit number as an input request command "2001H" ( Send one card insertion request command).
Further, when the 3-bet switch 40b is turned on, the main control board 50 requests the payout control board 100 to subtract the number of bets "3" from the number of credits as an insertion request command "2003H" (three sheets are inserted). Request command) is sent.
When the 3-bet switch 40b is turned on, the one-sheet insertion request command may be transmitted to the payout control board 100 three times as the insertion request command.

Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the input request command, whether or not the input request can be accepted, specifically, the number of credits is equal to or greater than the number of bets (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the input request command). Judge whether or not.
Then, when it is determined that the input request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of credits is equal to or greater than the number of bets, the payout control board 100 executes a process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits and credits. The process of updating the display of the number display LED 76 is executed, and the input repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50 (the received input request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the input request command shown in FIG. 5). ).

For example, when the credit number is "50" and the three-card insertion request command "2003H" is received, the payout control board 100 is indicated by a subsequent command of the three-card insertion request command "2003H" from the credit number "50". The process of subtracting the bet number "3" is executed, the display of the credit number display LED76 is changed from "50" to "47", and the input repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the insertion request cannot be accepted, that is, it is determined that the number of credits is less than the number of bets (for example, in the situation where the number of credits is "2", the three-card insertion request command "2003H" (Received), the payout control board 100 transmits a non-input command to the main control board 50 without executing the process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits (NAK of the input request command shown in FIG. 5). response).

Further, when the input repeat command is received (the transmitted input request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the request for subtracting the bet number from the credit number is permitted. A process corresponding to the bet of the electronic medal (for example, a process of turning on the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, and a process of making the operation of the start switch 41 acceptable) is executed.
On the other hand, when the non-insertion command is received, the main control board 50 determines that the request for subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits is not permitted, and does not execute the process according to the bet of the electronic medal.
Further, if neither the input repeat command nor the input non-input command is received even after a predetermined time has elapsed after transmitting the input request command, a timeout occurs, and the main control board 50 reappears to the payout control board 100. Send a submission request command.

In this way, when the payout control board 100 is requested to subtract the number of bets from the number of credits, one round-trip command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
As a result, the processing related to the betting of the electronic medal is surely executed on both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that the player is not disadvantaged. Can be done.

Further, as described above, when the power is turned off, the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped before the program on the main control board 50, and when returning from the power off, the program is paid out before the program on the main control board 50. The program on the control board 100 starts.
Furthermore, if the main control board 50 transmits a dosing request command to the payout control board 100 when the bet switch 40 is turned on, and the payout control board 100 can accept the payout request when receiving the payout request command, The input repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50, and if the input request cannot be accepted, the input non-input command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

Further, when the main control board 50 receives the input repeat command, it executes the process according to the bet of the electronic medal, and when it receives the command that cannot be inserted, it does not execute the process according to the bet of the electronic medal. If neither the input repeat command nor the input non-repeated command is received, the input request command is transmitted to the payout control board 100 again.
Here, after the main control board 50 transmits the payout request command to the payout control board 100 and before the payout control board 100 receives the payout request command, a power failure occurs and the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped. Suppose you did. In this case, the main control board 50 does not receive either the turn-on repeat command or the turn-on disable command, and after returning from the power failure, the turn-on request command is transmitted to the payout control board 100 again. Therefore, commands can be reliably transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits an input request command to the payout control board 100, and the payout control board 100 receives the input request command, but before transmitting the input repeat command or the input non-issue command to the main control board 50, It is assumed that the power supply is cut off and the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped. In this case, after returning from the power failure, the payout control board 100 transmits a turn-on repeat command or a turn-off disable command to the main control board 50, so that the payout control board 50 and the payout control board 100 can be reliably connected to each other. Can send and receive commands.

When the power is turned on, that is, when the power is restored from the power failure, the main control board 50 transmits a start confirmation command to the payout control board 100, and when the payout control board 100 receives the start confirmation command, it is used as it is. It is sent back to the main control board 50. Then, when the transmitted start confirmation command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, the main control board 50 determines that the communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 is normal. After that, the payout control board 100 transmits an input repeat command or an input non-input command to the main control board 50. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the program on the payout control board 100 is started before the program on the main control board 50, but the main control board 50 surely receives the input repeat command or the input non-input command. be able to.

Further, after the main control board 50 transmits an input request command to the payout control board 100, the payout control board 100 receives the input request command, and transmits an input repeat command or a non-input command to the main control board 50, the power supply is supplied. It is assumed that a disconnection occurs and the program of the payout control board 100 is stopped. In this case, since the program on the main control board 50 is stopped after the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped, the main control board 50 receives the input repeat command or the non-input command sent by the payout control board 100. Therefore, commands can be reliably transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.

In FIG. 4, the payout request command is a command that requests the payout control board 100 to add the number of payouts to the number of credits, and pays out from the main control board 50 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off. This is a command transmitted to the control board 100.
In addition, the subsequent command of the payout request command indicates the number of payouts (the number required to be added to the number of credits based on the winning combination).

For example, at the time of winning a winning combination of 10 cards, the main control board 50 sets the number of payouts "10" to the number of credits as a payout request command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off. Send "210AH" requesting addition.
Even when the winning combination is not won, the main control board 50 transmits a payout request command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off. In this case, since the number of payouts is "0", the payout request command is "2100H".

Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the payout request command, whether or not the payout request can be accepted, specifically, the number of payouts (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the payout request command) is added to the number of credits. This determines whether or not the upper limit of the number of credits (“10000” in this embodiment) is exceeded.
Then, when it is determined that the payout request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of payouts is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of credits even if the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, the payout control board 100 pays out to the number of credits. The process of adding the number of sheets is executed, the process of updating the display of the credit number display LED76 is executed, and the payout repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50 (the received payout request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is (Fig.). ACK response of the payout request command shown in 5)).

For example, when the payout request command "210AH" (10 cards are paid out) is received when the number of credits is "50", the payout control board 100 receives a command following the payout request command "210AH" on the number of credits "50". The process of adding the indicated number of payouts "10" is executed, the display of the credit number display LED is changed from "50" to "60", and the payout repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout request cannot be accepted, that is, when the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, it is judged that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded (for example, when the number of credits is "9995"). When the payout request command "210AH" (10 payouts) is received), the payout control board 100 transmits a payout non-payout command to the main control board 50 without executing the process of adding the number of payouts to the number of credits. (NAK response of the payout request command shown in FIG. 5).

Further, when the payout repeat command is received (the transmitted payout request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the number of payouts to the number of credits is permitted. Then, a process according to the payout of the electronic medal based on the winning of the winning combination (for example, a process of displaying the number of electronic medals paid out on the acquired number display LED 78) is executed.
On the other hand, when the non-payment command was received, the main control board 50 determined that the request to add the number of payouts to the number of credits was not permitted, and responded to the payout of the electronic medal based on the winning combination. Do not execute the process.

In this way, when the payout control board 100 is requested to add the number of payouts according to the winning combination to the number of credits, one round-trip command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
As a result, the process related to the payout of the electronic medal based on the winning of the winning combination is surely executed on both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be avoided.

In FIG. 4, the return request command is a command that requests the payout control board 100 to return the bet electronic medal to the credit, and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the cancel switch 46 is turned on. Command.
In addition, the subsequent command of the return request command indicates the number of returned medals (the number requested to be added to the number of credits based on the return of the electronic medal).
For example, when the cancel switch 46 is operated with three electronic medals bet, the main control board 50 sets the number of credits to the payout control board 100 as a return request command when the cancel switch 46 is turned on. A "2203H" requesting that the number of returned sheets "3" be added is transmitted.

Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the return request command, whether or not the return request can be accepted, specifically, the number of returned cards (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the return request command) is added to the number of credits. This determines whether or not the upper limit of the number of credits (“10000” in this embodiment) is exceeded.
Then, when it is determined that the return request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of returned credits is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of credits even if the number of returned credits is added, the payout control board 100 returns the number of credits. The process of adding the number of sheets is executed, the process of updating the display of the credit number display LED76 is executed, and the return repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50 (the received return request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is (Fig.). ACK response of the return request command shown in 5)).

For example, when the return request command "2203H" is received when the number of credits is "100", the payout control board 100 adds the number of credits "100" to the number of returns "3" indicated by the subsequent command of the return request command "2203H". Is executed, the display of the credit number display LED is changed from "100" to "103", and the return repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the return request cannot be accepted, that is, when the number of returned credits is added to the number of credits, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded (for example, when the number of credits is "9999"). When the return request command "2203H" is received (there is a request to return three electronic medals), the payout control board 100 does not execute the process of adding the number of returned sheets to the number of credits, and the non-returnable command. Is transmitted to the main control board 50 (NAK response of the return request command shown in FIG. 5).

Further, when the return repeat command is received (the transmitted return request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the number of returned sheets to the number of credits is permitted. Then, a process corresponding to the return of the electronic medal (for example, a process of turning off the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, and a process of disallowing the operation of the start switch 41) is executed.
On the other hand, when the non-returnable command is received, the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the number of returned cards to the number of credits is not permitted, and does not execute the process corresponding to the return of the electronic medal.

In this way, when the payout control board 100 is requested to return the bet electronic medal to the credit, one round-trip command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
As a result, the process related to the return of the electronic medal is surely executed on both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that the player is not disadvantaged. Can be done.

In FIG. 6, the lending request command is a command that requests the payout control board 100 to add the number of lending sheets to the number of credits, and the management device (CR unit) 200 sends the lending control board 100 to the payout control board 100 when the lending switch 202 is turned on. This is the command to be sent.
Further, the subsequent command of the loan request command indicates the number of loans (the number of requests to be added to the number of credits based on the loan of electronic medals).

For example, when a 1000-yen bill is inserted into the bill slot 201 of the management device 200 and the lending switch 202 is operated in a situation where the frequency "10" is displayed on the frequency display unit 204, the management device 200 causes the management device 200 to operate. When the lending switch 202 is turned on, "4032H" is transmitted to the payout control board 100 as a lending request command, which requests that the number of lending "50" be added to the number of credits.

Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the lending request command, whether or not the lending request can be accepted, specifically, the number of lending (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the lending request command) is added to the number of credits. This determines whether or not the upper limit of the number of credits (“10000” in this embodiment) is exceeded.
Then, when it is determined that the loan request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of credits is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of credits even if the number of loans is added, the payout control board 100 is sent to the management device 200. In response to this, a lending repeat command is transmitted (the received lending request command is sent back to the management device 200 as it is (ACK response of the lending request command shown in FIG. 7)).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the loan request cannot be accepted, that is, when the number of loans is added to the number of credits, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded (for example, when the number of credits is "9955"). When the lending request command "4032H" (the number of lending sheets is "50") is received), the payout control board 100 transmits an error command "E000H" to the management device 200 (NAK response at the time of abnormality shown in FIG. 7). ).

Further, when the loan repeat command is received (the transmitted loan request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the management device 200 instructs the payout control board 100 to execute the loan request. Is transmitted, and further, a process of updating the display of the frequency display unit 204 according to the number of loaned sheets is executed.

For example, the management device 200 transmits "4032H" (rental number "50") as a loan request command to the management device 100, and then the payout control board 100 sends "4032H" as a loan repeat command to the management device 200. (ACK response of the lending request command), the management device 200 instructs the payout control board 100 to add the number of lending "50" to the number of credits as a lending instruction command "4132H". To send. Further, the management device 200 executes a process of subtracting the frequency "10" according to the number of loaned sheets "50" from the numerical value displayed on the frequency display unit 204.

On the other hand, when the error command is received, the management device 200 controls to return to the standby state.
When the loan instruction command is received, the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the number of loans to the number of credits and updates the display of the credit number display LED 76.
For example, when the number of credits is "50" and the loan instruction command "4132H" (the number of loans "50") is received, the payout control board 100 follows the loan instruction command "4132H" to the number of credits "50". The process of adding the number of loans "50" indicated by the command is executed, and the display of the credit number display LED is changed from "50" to "100".

In this way, when the electronic medal is lent from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10, one and a half round-trip command communication is performed between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100.
As a result, the processing related to the lending of the electronic medal is surely executed by both the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that the player is not disadvantaged. can.

In FIG. 7, the lower count request command and the upper count request command are commands that request the management device (CR unit) 200 to refund the electronic medals, and the payout control board 100 is sent to the management device 200 when the count switch 47 is turned on. This is the command to be sent.
Further, the subsequent command of the lower count request command indicates the lower 8 bits when the number of refunds (number of credits) is represented by 16 bits (2 bytes).
Furthermore, the subsequent command of the higher count request command indicates the upper 8 bits when the number of refunds (number of credits) is represented by 16 bits.
That is, the number of refunds is specified from the subsequent command of the lower count request command and the subsequent command of the upper count request command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is set to "10000 (D)". The upper limit of the number of credits, "10000 (D)", is "10011100010000 (B)" in binary and "2710 (H)" in hexadecimal. As described above, the upper limit of the number of credits "10000 (D)" cannot be represented by 8 bits (1 byte). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of refunds (number of credits) is specified by 16 bits (2 bytes) of the subsequent command of the lower count request command and the subsequent command of the upper count request command.

For example, it is assumed that the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where 1000 electronic medals are credited to the payout control board 100 (the number of credits is "1000 (D)"). Here, the number of credits "1000 (D)" is "1111101000 (B)" in binary and "03E8 (H)" in hexadecimal. In this case, the lower count request command is "50E8 (H)" and the upper count request command is "5103 (H)". Then, when the counting switch 47 is turned on, the payout control board 100 transmits "50E8 (H)" to the management device 200 as a lower counting request command.

Further, upon receiving the lower count request command, the management device 200 determines whether or not the refund request can be accepted.
Then, when it is determined that the refund request can be accepted, the management device 200 transmits a lower count repeat command to the payout control board 100 (the received lower count request command is sent back to the payout control board 100 as it is (). ACK response of the lower count request command shown in FIG. 6)).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the refund request cannot be accepted, the management device 200 transmits an error command "E000H" to the payout control board 100 (NAK response at the time of abnormality shown in FIG. 6). In this case, the management device 200 controls to return to the standby state.

Further, when the lower count repeat command is received (the transmitted lower count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the payout control board 100 sends the management device 200 a "5103 (5103) as a higher count request command. H) ”is sent.
On the other hand, when the error command is received, the payout control board 100 controls to return to the standby state without transmitting the upper count request command.

Further, when the higher count request command is received, the management device 200 transmits a higher count repeat command to the payout control board 100 (the received upper count request command is sent back to the payout control board 100 as it is (upper rank shown in FIG. 6). ACK response of the count request command)).
Furthermore, when the higher count repeat command is received (the transmitted higher count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the payout control board 100 sends a count instruction command to the management device 200, and further , The process of clearing the number of credits (setting to "0") is executed, and the process of updating the display of the credit number display LED76 (setting to "0") is executed.

Further, upon receiving the counting instruction command, the management device 200 executes a process of reflecting the number of refunds specified from the lower counting request command and the upper counting request command in the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200 side. To control.
After that, when the return switch 203 is operated, the management device 200 displays the number of electronic medals returned from the slot machine 10 (payout control board 100) to the management device 200 by the operation of the counting switch 47, and the frequency display unit 204. The number of electronic medals corresponding to the displayed frequency is stored in a card (magnetic card, IC card, etc.) as electronic data, and the card is ejected from the ejection port of the card reader / writer 205.

In this way, when the electronic medal is refunded from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200, a command communication of one and a half round trips is performed between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
As a result, the processing related to the refund of the electronic medal is surely executed on both the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that the player is not disadvantaged. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the credit number management CPU 105 is set with a unique ID composed of 4-byte data. Then, in FIG. 7, the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU-specific ID are commands for transmitting the 1st to 4th bytes of the ID unique to the credit number management CPU 105 to the management device 200.
When the power is turned on, the payout control board 100 sequentially transmits the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID to the management device 200.

When the management device 200 receives the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID, it stores (saves) these in a predetermined storage area and sequentially transmits them to the hall computer 300.
Furthermore, when the hall computer 300 receives the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID, it stores (saves) these in a predetermined storage area.
Further, the management device 200 and the hall computer 300 can keep the stored CPU-specific IDs 1st to 4th bytes as a history.

For example, if the payout control board 100 is illegally replaced, the credit number management CPU 105 mounted on the payout control board 100 changes. The 1st to 4th bytes of the ID will also change.
Therefore, by checking whether the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID stored in the management device 200 and the hall computer 300 have not changed in the middle, whether or not the payout control board 100 has been illegally replaced. Can be determined.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a processing flow of the main routine on the payout control board 100.
In the main routine of the payout control board 100, when any signal is input to the input port 101 in step S101, the process proceeds to the next step S102, and the payout control board 100 receives the input signal as an ON signal of the counting switch 47. The process of determining whether or not is is executed.
Here, when it is determined that the count switch 47 is an ON signal, the process proceeds to the next step S103 and the process of turning on the count request flag is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S104.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the counting switch 47 is not an ON signal, step S103 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the VL signal is on.
Here, if a VL signal (DC 18V signal) is supplied from the management device (CR unit) 200 to the payout control board 100, in step S104, it is determined that the VL signal is on, and the payout control board 200 and the payout control board 200 are paid out. It is determined that the control board 100 is normally connected, and the process proceeds to step S105 to execute the process of clearing the VL error flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S107.
On the other hand, if the VL signal is not supplied from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100, in step S104, it is determined that the VL signal is off, and the management device 200 and the payout control board 100 are normally connected. It is determined that this is not the case, and the process proceeds to step S106 to execute the process of setting the VL error flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S107.

In step S107, the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the signal input (received) to the input port 101 is the main control command.
Here, when it is determined that the input signal is the main control command, the process proceeds to the next step S108, and the payout control board 100 stores (saves) the input main control command in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 103. do. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S109.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the input signal is not the main control command, step S108 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S109.

In step S109, the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the stored command is the main control command.
Here, when it is determined that the stored command is the main control command, the process proceeds to the next step S110, and the payout control board 100 executes the main control command analysis process (FIGS. 9 and 10). Details of the main control command analysis process will be described later. Then, when the main control command analysis process is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S111.

In step S111, the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the counting process (FIG. 12) is being executed.
Here, the counting process is a process started when “Yes” is set in step S116 described later, and the details thereof will be described later. Further, during the counting process, the main routine of the payout control board 100 can be executed in parallel with the counting process. Therefore, in step S111 of the main routine of the payout control board 100, the determination process of whether or not the counting process is being executed is executed.
At the start of the counting process, the flag during the counting process is set, and at the end of the counting process, the flag during the counting process is cleared. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the counting process is being executed by checking the on / off of the counting process flag.

Then, when it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the process after step S113.
When it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is being executed, the counting process being executed is continued thereafter.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S113, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the lending process (FIG. 11) is being executed. do.

Here, the lending process is a process started when “Yes” is set in step S118 described later, and the details thereof will be described later. Further, during the lending process, the main routine of the payout control board 100 can be executed in parallel with the lending process. Therefore, in step S113 of the main routine of the payout control board 100, a process of determining whether or not the lending process is being executed is executed.
The lending processing flag is set at the start of the lending processing, and the lending processing flag is cleared at the end of the lending processing. Thereby, by checking the on / off of the lending processing flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the lending processing is being executed.

Then, when it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the process after step S115.
When it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is being executed, the lending process being executed is continued thereafter.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S115, and the payout control board 100 executes the process of determining whether or not the gaming machine command is being transmitted.

Here, the game machine command transmission process is a process executed when "No" is obtained in step S118 described later. Further, during the game machine command transmission process, the main routine of the payout control board 100 can be executed in parallel with the game machine command transmission process. Therefore, in step S115 of the main routine of the payout control board 100, a process of determining whether or not the game machine command transmission process is being executed is executed.
Then, when it is determined in step S115 that the game machine command transmission process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the processes after step S116.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S115 that the gaming machine command transmission process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S116, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the counting request flag is on. ..

When it is determined in step S116 that the counting request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117, and the payout control board 100 starts the counting process (FIG. 12). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S116 that the count request flag is off, the process proceeds to step S118, and the payout control board 100 determines whether the signal input (received) to the input port 101 is a lending request command. Executes the judgment process of whether or not.

Here, when it is determined that the input (received) signal is the lending request command, the process proceeds to step S119, and the payout control board 100 starts the lending process (FIG. 11). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the input signal is not the lending request command, the process proceeds to step S120, and the payout control board 100 executes the game machine command transmission process. This process is a process of transmitting a game machine command to the management device 200. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As described above, it is determined in step S111 whether or not the counting process is being executed, and when it is determined that the counting process is being executed, the counting process is being executed without executing the processes after step S113. When the processing is continued and it is determined that the counting process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S113 to determine whether or not the lending process is being executed.
Further, in step S116, it is determined whether or not the counting request flag is on, and when it is determined that the counting request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117 to start the counting process, and the counting request flag is off. When it is determined, the process proceeds to step S118 to determine whether or not the loan request command has been received.

In this way, the payout control board 100 can execute the counting process (process related to the refund of the electronic medal) and the lending process (process related to the lending of the electronic medal), and determines whether or not the counting process is being executed. The process is performed before the process of determining whether or not the lending process is being executed, and the process of determining whether or not the count request flag is on is performed from the process of determining whether or not the lending request command has been received. By performing it first, the counting process is set to be executed with priority over the lending process.
Here, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the payout control board 100 executes the counting process.
Further, when the lending switch 202 is operated and the lending request command is transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100, the payout control board 100 executes the lending process.

Furthermore, when the counting switch 47 and the lending switch 202 are operated at the same time, the payout control board 100 gives priority to the counting process, so that the counting process is executed and the lending process is not executed.
Once the lent electronic medal is refunded, if the electronic medal cannot be exchanged for money equivalently, it will be disadvantageous to the player, but the counting process is prioritized and the lending process is not executed. By executing the counting process, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, when the counting switch 47 is operated during the lending process, the payout control board 100 accepts the operation of the counting switch 47, continues the lending process being executed, and when the lending process is completed, the counting process is completed. To execute.
That is, the payout control board 100 can accept the operation of the counting switch 47 at any time including the execution of the lending process and the rotation of the reel 31, and by accepting the operation of the counting switch 47. , The counting process can be executed at an appropriate timing thereafter.
As a result, if the counting switch 47 is operated once, the electronic medal can be refunded without fail, and the re-operation of the counting switch 47 can be eliminated, so that the player does not feel annoyed. Can be done.

9 and 10 show a subroutine of the main control command analysis process in step S110 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart following FIG.
As described above, the commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 are collectively referred to as main control commands.
Further, as the main control command, eight types of commands described in the “content” column in FIG. 4 can be mentioned.
Then, in the main control command analysis process, it is determined which of the eight types of commands has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed.

Specifically, in the main control command analysis process, in step S131, a process of determining whether or not the error flag is on (whether an error has occurred) is executed.
Then, when it is determined that the error flag is on, the process proceeds to step S132, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting an error command to the main control board 50. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the error flag is off, the process proceeds to step S133.

In step S133, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the received command is a start confirmation command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a start confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S134, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received start confirmation command back to the main control board 50 as it is (of the start confirmation command). ACK response).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not a start confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S135.

Proceeding to step S135, the payout control board 100 determines whether or not the received command is either an input request command, a return request command, or a payout request command, that is, whether or not it is an operation request command. To execute.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is any of the input request command, the return request command, and the payout request command, that is, when it is determined that the command is an operation request command, the process proceeds to step S138 of FIG.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is neither the input request command, the return request command, nor the payout request command, that is, when it is determined that the command is not an operation request command, the process proceeds to step S136.

Here, if the received command is a start confirmation command, it becomes "Yes" in step S133 and proceeds to step S134, and the received command is an operation request command (input request command, return request command, or payout request command). ), The result is “Yes” in step S135, and the process proceeds to step S138 in FIG. Therefore, among the eight types of commands shown in the "contents" column of FIG. 4, the command that becomes "No" in step S135 and proceeds to step S136 is the setting change start command, the setting change end command, and the game start + RT state. When a command or a game end + game status command is received, that is, when a game information command is received.

Then, in step S136, the payout control board 100 puts the received game information command (setting change start command, setting change end command, game start + RT state command, or game end + game state command) into the command buffer for transmitting the management device. The process of setting is executed, and in the next step S137, the process of sending the received game information command back to the main control board 50 as it is is executed (ACK response of the game information command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
When the process of setting the game information command in the management device transmission command buffer is executed in step S136, the game information command is stored in the management device transmission command buffer by the interrupt process on the payout control board 100 executed after this process. The game information command that has been executed will be transmitted to the management device 200.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S138 of FIG. 10, the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is an input request command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is an input request command, the process proceeds to step S139, and the payout control board 100 masks the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the input request command with "03H (00000011B)". To execute.
As described above, the subsequent command of the input request command indicates the number of bets. Further, the maximum value of the number of bets is set to "3", and when three cards are inserted, the subsequent command of the insertion request command is "03H (00000011B)". That is, the maximum value of the number of bets can be represented by bits D0 to D1 in the subsequent command of the input request command.

Therefore, in step S139, a process of masking the subsequent command of the input request command with "03H (00000011B)" is executed. That is, the subsequent command of the input request command and "03H (00000011B)" are ANDed.
As a result, bits other than the D0 to D1 bits in the command following the input request command can be set to "0", and even if "1" is input to the D2 to D7 bits in the command following the input request command due to noise. Since this can be set to "0", it is possible to prevent accidentally subtracting a number exceeding "3" from the number of credits at the time of insertion.

Further, when the process of step S139 is executed, the process proceeds to step S140, and whether or not the payout control board 100 is "(number of credits-number of bets) <0", that is, whether or not the number of credits is less than the number of bets. Execute the judgment process.
Then, when it is determined that the number of credits is less than the number of bets, the process proceeds to step S141, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a non-input command to the main control board 50 (NAK response of the input request command). .. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of credits is equal to or greater than the number of bets, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S142, executes a process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits, and in the next step S143, inserts and repeats. The process of transmitting the command to the main control board 50 (sending the received input request command back to the main control board 50 as it is) is executed (ACK response of the input request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

If it is determined in step S138 that the received command is not an input request command, the process proceeds to step S144, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a payout request command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a payout request command, the process proceeds to step S145, and the payout control board 100 masks the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the payout request command with "0FH (000011111B)". To execute.
As described above, the subsequent command of the payout request command indicates the number of payouts. Further, the maximum value of the number of payouts is set to "15", and when 15 pieces are paid out, the subsequent command of the payout request command is "0EH (000001110B)". That is, the maximum value of the number of payouts can be represented by bits D0 to D3 in the subsequent command of the payout request command.

Therefore, in step S145, a process of masking the subsequent command of the payout request command with "0FH (000011111B)" is executed. That is, the subsequent command of the payout request command and "0FH (000011111B)" are ANDed. As a result, the bits other than the D0 to D3 bits in the command following the payout request command can be set to "0", and even if "1" is entered in the D4 to D7 bits in the command following the payout request command due to noise. Since this can be set to "0", it is possible to prevent accidentally adding a number exceeding "15" to the number of credits at the time of payout.

Further, when the process of step S145 is executed, the process proceeds to step S146, and whether or not the payout control board 100 is "(number of credits + number of payouts)> upper limit value", that is, when the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, the number of credits is calculated. The process of determining whether or not the upper limit value (“10000” in the present embodiment) is exceeded is executed.
Then, when it is determined that adding the number of payouts to the number of credits exceeds the upper limit of the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S147, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a non-payout command to the main control board 50 (). NAK response of the payout request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is not exceeded even if the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S148 and executes a process of adding the number of payouts to the number of credits. Then, in the next step S149, a process of transmitting the payout repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received payout request command back to the main control board 50 as it is) is executed (ACK response of the payout request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

If it is determined in step S144 that the received command is not a payout request command, the process proceeds to step S150, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a return request command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a return request command, the process proceeds to step S151, and the payout control board 100 masks the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the return request command with "03H (00000011B)". To execute.
As described above, the subsequent command of the return request command indicates the number of returned items. Further, since the maximum value of the number of bets is "3", the maximum value of the number of returned sheets is also "3". Then, when returning three sheets, the subsequent command of the return request command is "03H (00000011B)". That is, the maximum value of the number of returned sheets can be represented by bits D0 to D1 in the subsequent command of the return request command, similarly to the maximum value of the number of bets.

Therefore, in step S151, a process of masking the subsequent command of the return request command with "03H (00000011B)" is executed. That is, the subsequent command of the return request command and "03H (00000011B)" are ANDed. As a result, bits other than the D0 to D1 bits in the command following the return request command can be set to "0", and even if "1" is entered in the D2 to D7 bits in the command following the return request command due to noise, Since this can be set to "0", it is possible to prevent accidentally adding a number exceeding "3" to the number of credits at the time of return.

Further, when the process of step S151 is executed, the process proceeds to step S152, and whether or not the payout control board 100 is "(number of credits + number of returned cards)> upper limit value", that is, when the number of returned cards is added to the number of credits, the number of credits is calculated. The process of determining whether or not the upper limit value (“10000” in the present embodiment) is exceeded is executed.
Then, when it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded when the number of returned cards is added to the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S153, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a non-returnable command to the main control board 50 (). NAK response of return request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is not exceeded even if the number of returned credits is added to the number of credits, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S154 and executes a process of adding the number of returned credits to the number of credits. Then, in the next step S155, a process of transmitting the return repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received return request command to the main control board 50 as it is) is executed (ACK response of the return request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S111 shown in FIG.

FIG. 11 shows a subroutine of lending processing in step S119 of FIG. Note that the term "lending process 1" in FIG. 11 indicates that it is a part of the lending process in step S119 of FIG. The other part of the lending process is illustrated in FIG. 23 (referred to as “lending process 2”) described later.
If it is determined that the lending request command has been received in step S118 of FIG. 8, the process proceeds to step S119 of FIG. As a result, the lending process shown in FIG. 11 is started. Further, in the lending process, in step S161, the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting the lending repeat command to the management device 200 (sending the received lending request command back to the management device 200 as it is) (ACK of the lending request command). response). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S162.

In step S162, the payout control board 100 repeatedly executes the process of determining whether or not the transmission of the loan repeat command is completed until it becomes “Yes”, and when it becomes “Yes” in step S162, the process proceeds to step S163.
Proceeding to step S163, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a management device command has been received. As described above, the management device command is a general term for commands transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100.
Then, when it is determined in step S163 that the management device command has been received, the process proceeds to step S164 to execute a process of determining whether or not the received management device command is a lending instruction command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S163 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S168, and the payout control board 100 has timed out (a predetermined time has elapsed since the loan repeat command was transmitted). Executes the judgment process of whether or not.
Here, when it is determined in step S168 that the time-out has occurred, the process proceeds to step S169, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S168 that the time-out has not occurred, the process of step S163 is executed again.

Further, in step S164, when it is determined that the received management device command is a lending instruction command, the process proceeds to step S165, and the payout control board 100 is lent out (the command following the lending request command (lower 8 bits) and lending. The process of determining whether or not the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the instruction command matches is executed.
Here, if it is determined in step S165 that they do not match, the process proceeds to the next step S166, and the payout control board 100 stores the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the lending instruction command as the number of payouts in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 103. Remember (save). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S167.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S165 that they match, step S166 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S167.

Proceeding to step S167, the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the number of loans to the number of credits. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
If it is determined in step S164 that the received management device command is not a lending instruction command, the process proceeds to step S169, and the payout control board 100 sets an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
If the error flag is set in step S169, it is determined as "Yes" in step S131 of the main control command analysis process of FIG. 9 executed after this process, and the process proceeds to step S132. Then, an error command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

FIG. 12 shows a subroutine of counting processing in step S117 of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 12, "counting process 1" indicates that it is a part of the counting process in step S117 of FIG. The other part of the counting process is shown in FIG. 24 (referred to as “counting process 2”) described later.
If it is determined in step S116 of FIG. 8 that the count request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117 of FIG. As a result, the counting process of FIG. 12 is started. Further, in the counting process, in step S181, the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a lower counting request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S182.

In step S182, the payout control board 100 repeatedly executes the determination process of whether or not the transmission of the lower count request command is completed until it becomes “Yes”, and when it becomes “Yes” in step S182, the process proceeds to step S183.
Proceeding to step S183, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a management device command has been received.
Then, when it is determined in step S183 that the management device command has been received, the process proceeds to step S184, and a process of determining whether or not the received command and the transmitted command match is executed. That is, the process of determining whether or not the transmitted lower count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is (the lower count repeat command is received) is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S183 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S192, and the payout control board 100 times out (a predetermined time has elapsed since the lower count request command was transmitted). Executes the process of determining whether or not.
Here, when it is determined in step S192 that the time-out has occurred, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S192 that the time-out has not occurred, the process of step S183 is executed again.

Further, in step S184, when it is determined that the received command and the transmitted command match (the transmitted lower count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the process proceeds to step S185, and the payout control board 100 , The process of transmitting the upper count request command to the management device 200 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S186.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S184 that the received command and the transmitted command do not match, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Proceeding to step S186, the payout control board 100 repeatedly executes the determination process of whether or not the transmission of the upper count request command is completed until it becomes "Yes", and when it becomes "Yes" in step S186, it goes to step S187. move on.
Proceeding to step S187, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a management device command has been received.
Then, in step S187, when it is determined that the management device command has been received, the process proceeds to step S188, and a process of determining whether or not the received command and the transmitted command match is executed. That is, the process of determining whether or not the transmitted high-level count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is (the high-level count repeat command is received) is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S187 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S193, and the payout control board 100 times out (a predetermined time has elapsed since the upper count request command was transmitted). Executes the process of determining whether or not.
Here, when it is determined in step S193 that the time-out has occurred, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S193 that the time-out has not occurred, the process of step S187 is executed again.

Further, in step S188, when it is determined that the received command and the transmitted command match (the transmitted higher count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the process proceeds to step S189, and the payout control board 100 , The process of transmitting the counting instruction command to the management device 200 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S190.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S188 that the received command and the transmitted command do not match, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In step S190, the payout control board 100 repeatedly executes the determination process of whether or not the transmission of the counting instruction command is completed until it becomes "Yes", and when it becomes "Yes" in step S190, it proceeds to step S191. ..
Proceeding to step S191, the payout control board 100 executes a process of clearing the number of credits (making it “0”). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
If the error flag is set in step S194, it is determined as "Yes" in step S131 of the main control command analysis process of FIG. 9 executed after this process, and the process proceeds to step S132. Then, an error command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a processing flow of the main routine on the main control board 50.
When the power is turned on in the main control board 50, the power-on process is performed in step S201. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S202.
Proceeding to step S202, a process of determining whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on is executed.

Here, when it is determined in step S202 that the setting key switch 12 is on, the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the setting change process. Then, when the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to step S211.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S202 that the setting key switch 12 is off, the process proceeds to step S204 to execute the game return process. Then, when the game return process is completed, the process proceeds to step S211.
Proceeding to step S211, a determination process of three-card bet or one-card bet is executed. Then, when it is determined that the bet is three, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the bet is one, the process proceeds to step S206.

Proceeding to step S205, a three-card bet process (FIG. 16) is executed. This process is a process of betting three credited electronic medals based on the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b. The details of the 3-card bet processing will be described later. Then, when the three-card betting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.
Proceeding to step S206, a single bet process (FIG. 17) is executed. This process is a process of betting one credited electronic medal based on the operation of the one-bet switch 40a. The details of the single bet processing will be described later. Then, when the one-card betting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.

Proceeding to step S212, a start or cancel determination process is executed. Then, when it is determined to start, the process proceeds to step S207, and when it is determined to cancel, the process proceeds to step S210.
Proceeding to step S207, the game start process (FIG. 18) is executed. This process is a process of starting the game based on the operation of the start switch 41. The details of the game start process will be described later. Then, when the game start process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S208.

In step S208, the game end process (FIG. 19) is executed. This process is a process of ending the game based on the fact that the stop switch 42 is operated and the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped. The details of the game end process will be described later. Then, when the game end process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S209, and the payout process (FIG. 20) is executed. This process is a process of paying out an electronic medal based on a winning combination. Then, when the payout process is completed, the process returns to step S211.
Proceeding to step S210, the return process (FIG. 21) is executed. This process is a process of returning the bet electronic medal to the credit based on the operation of the cancel switch 46. Then, when the return process is completed, the process returns to step S211.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of power-on processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 14, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the power-on process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the power-on process 1 on the payout control board 100. Note that "power-on processing 1" is shown in FIG. 14 as a part of the power-on processing on the payout control board 100. The other part of the power-on process is shown in FIG. 22 (referred to as “power-on process 2”) described later. Further, in FIG. 14, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the power-on process.
14 and 15 to 21 described later show the command transmission / reception status between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
23 to 25, which will be described later, show a command transmission / reception status between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, power is supplied from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100. Then, the program on the main control board 50 is started, and the program on the payout control board 100 is started. At this time, the power-on process is executed on the main control board 50, and the power-on process 1 is executed on the payout control board 100.

First, the power-on process on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 14 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side of FIG. 14 shows the power-on processing subroutine in step S201 of FIG.
In step S301, the main control board 50 executes the initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S302.
Proceeding to step S302, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a start confirmation command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S303.
In step S303, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for an ACK response of a start confirmation command by the payout control board 100.

Then, when the transmitted start confirmation command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is (there is an ACK response), the process according to this flowchart ends. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S202 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, there is no ACK response of the startup confirmation command (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has passed since the activation confirmation command was transmitted, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK response is sent). Then, the process proceeds to step S304, and the main control board 50 executes a process of subtracting the retransmission counter.
The retransmission counter is a counter for counting the number of retransmissions of the start confirmation command, and "2" is set as an initial value when the start confirmation command is first transmitted.
The initial value of the retransmission counter is not limited to "2", and may be, for example, "3".

When the subtraction process of the retransmission counter is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S305, and the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not the retransmission counter is “0”.
Here, when it is determined that the retransmission counter is "0", the process proceeds to the next step S306, and the main control board 50 executes error processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the retransmission counter is not "0", step S302 is executed again.

Next, the power-on process 1 in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 14 will be described.
In step S401, the payout control board 100 executes the initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S402.
In step S402, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a start confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the start confirmation command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S403, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received start confirmation command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the start confirmation command). Then, when the received start confirmation command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a flow of setting change processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 15, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the setting change process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the setting change process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 15, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the setting change process.

First, the setting change process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 15 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 15 shows a subroutine of the setting change process in step S203 of FIG.
If the setting key switch 12 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control board 50 executes the setting change process. In this setting change process, in step S311 a process of transmitting a setting change start command to the payout control board 100 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S312.
In step S312, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for an ACK response of a setting change start command by the payout control board 100.
Here, when the transmitted setting change start command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, the main control board 50 determines that the payout control board 100 has received an ACK response of the setting change start command, and changes the set value in step S203. Proceed to intermediate processing. In this process, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display of the set value is switched from "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → "1" → ..., and the start switch 41 When is operated, it is a process of confirming with the set value being displayed. Then, when the process of changing the set value is completed, the process proceeds to step S313.

On the other hand, there is no ACK response (timeout) of the setting change start command even after a predetermined time has passed since the setting change start command was transmitted, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK). When there is a response), the process returns to step S311 and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the setting change start command to the payout control board 100.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S313, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a setting change end command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S314.

In step S314, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for an ACK response of a setting change end command by the payout control board 100.
Here, when the transmitted setting change end command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, the main control board 50 determines that there is an ACK response of the setting change end command by the payout control board 100, and ends the process according to this flowchart. do. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S211 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, there is no ACK response (timeout) of the setting change end command even after a predetermined time has passed since the setting change end command was transmitted, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK). When there is a response), the process returns to step S313, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the setting change end command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the flow of the setting change process in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 15 will be described.
In step S411, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a setting change start command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the setting change start command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S412, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received setting change start command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the setting change start command). .. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S413.

Proceeding to step S413, the payout control board 100 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a setting change end command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the setting change end command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S414, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received setting change end command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the setting change end command). .. Then, when the received setting change end command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the flow of the three-sheet betting process on the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 16, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the three-sheet betting process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the three-sheet betting process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 16, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the three-sheet betting process.

Further, FIG. 16 shows an example in which a one-card insertion request command (“2001H”) requesting that the number of bets “1” is subtracted from the number of credits is transmitted three times as an insertion request command at the time of processing three bets. ing.
It should be noted that the three-card insertion request command ("2003H") that requests the subtraction of the bet number "3" from the number of credits is not limited to the transmission of the one-card insertion request command three times during the three-card insertion request processing. You may send it once.

First, the three-sheet betting process on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 16 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 16 shows the subroutine of the three-card betting process in step S205 of FIG.
In step S321, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a predetermined number of electronic medals have been bet. Then, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, if the operation (ON) of the 3-bet switch 40b is detected in the next step S322, the process proceeds to the next step S323.
In step S323, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a single sheet insertion request command to the payout control board 100 as an input request command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S324.

In step S324, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the one-sheet insertion repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command).
Then, when the one-sheet insertion repeat command is received (the transmitted one-sheet insertion request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 receives an ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command by the payout control board 100. It is determined that there was, and the process proceeds to step S325.

On the other hand, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the one-sheet insertion request command was transmitted in step S323, the one-sheet insertion repeat command is not received (timeout occurs), or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100. (There is a NAK response), the process returns to step S323, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the one-sheet insertion request command to the payout control board 100.
After that, the main control board 50 executes the same processing as in steps S323 and S324 in steps S325 and S326, and steps S327 and S328. That is, the same process as in steps S323 and S324 is repeatedly executed three times. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S212 shown in FIG.

Next, the three-sheet betting process on the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 16 will be described.
In step S421, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a single sheet insertion request command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the one-sheet insertion request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S422, and the payout control board 100 transmits the one-sheet insertion repeat command to the main control board 50 (the received one-sheet insertion request command is directly transmitted to the main control board). Execute the process (send back to 50) (ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S423.
After that, the payout control board 100 executes the same processing as in steps S421 and S422 in steps S423 and S424, and steps S425 and S426. That is, the same process as in steps S421 and S422 is repeatedly executed three times. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of single bet processing on the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 17, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the single bet process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the single bet process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 17, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the single bet processing.

First, a single bet process on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 17 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side of FIG. 17 shows a subroutine of single bet processing in step S206 of FIG.
In step S331, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a predetermined number of electronic medals have been bet. Then, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, if the operation (ON) of the 1-bet switch 40a is detected in the next step S332, the process proceeds to the next step S333.
In step S333, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a single sheet insertion request command to the payout control board 100 as an input request command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S334.

In step S334, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the one-sheet insertion repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command).
Then, when the one-sheet insertion repeat command is received (the transmitted one-sheet insertion request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 receives an ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command by the payout control board 100. It is determined that there was, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S212 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the one-sheet insertion request command was transmitted in step S333, the one-sheet insertion repeat command is not received (timeout occurs), or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100. (There is a NAK response), the process returns to step S333, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the one-sheet insertion request command to the payout control board 100.

Next, a single bet process on the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 17 will be described.
In step S431, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a single sheet insertion request command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the one-sheet insertion request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S432, and the payout control board 100 transmits the one-sheet insertion repeat command to the main control board 50 (the received one-sheet insertion request command is directly transmitted to the main control board). Execute the process (send back to 50) (ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game start process on the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 18, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the game start process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the game start process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 18, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the game start process.

First, the game start process on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 18 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 18 shows a subroutine of the game start process in step S207 of FIG.
In step S351, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a predetermined number of electronic medals have been bet. Then, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, if the operation (ON) of the start switch 41 is detected in the next step S352, the process proceeds to the next step S353.
In step S353, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a game start + RT state command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S354.
In step S354, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the game start + RT state command to be sent back (ACK response) from the payout control board 100.

Then, the transmitted game start + RT state command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the payout control board 100 has received an ACK response, and ends the process according to this flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S208 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, there is no ACK response (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the game start + RT status command was transmitted in step S353, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process returns to step S353, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the game start + RT state command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the game start process on the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 18 will be described.
In step S451, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving the game start + RT state command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the game start + RT state command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S452, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received game start + RT state command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game end processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 19, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the game end processing on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the game end processing on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 19, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of the command transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 at the time of the game end processing.

First, the game end processing on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 19 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 19 shows a subroutine of the game end processing in step S208 of FIG.
In step S361, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last) has been turned from on to off. Then, when it is determined that the third stop switch 42 is not turned off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third stop switch 42 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S362.
Proceeding to step S362, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting the game end + game state command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S363.
In step S363, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the game end + game state command to be sent back (ACK response) from the payout control board 100.

Then, the transmitted game end + game state command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the payout control board 100 has received an ACK response, and ends the process according to this flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to step S209 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, there is no ACK response (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the game end + game status command was transmitted in step S362, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK). When there is a response), the process returns to step S362, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the game end + game state command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the game end processing in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 19 will be described.
In step S461, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving the game end + game state command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the game end + game state command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S462, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received game end + game state command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 20, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the payout process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the payout process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 20, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the payout process.

First, the payout process on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 20 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 20 shows the subroutine of the payout process in step S209 of FIG.
In step S371, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a payout request command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S372.
In step S372, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process waits for the payout repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the payout request command).

Then, when the payout repeat command is received (the transmitted payout request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the payout control board 100 has received an ACK response to the payout request command. End the process according to the flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process returns to the process of step S211 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, the payout repeat command is not received (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the payout request command was sent in step S371, or the payout control board 100 sends an error command (NAK response). Then, the process returns to step S371, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the payout request command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the payout process on the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 20 will be described.
In step S471, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a payout request command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the payout request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S472, and the payout control board 100 transmits the payout repeat command to the main control board 50 (the received payout request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is). Execute (ACK response of payout request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a flow of return processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 21, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the return process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the return process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 21, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the return process.

First, the return process on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 21 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 20 shows the subroutine of the return process in step S210 of FIG.
In step S341, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not there is a bet electronic medal. Then, when it is determined that there is no electronic medal bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an electronic medal bet, if the operation (ON) of the cancel switch 46 is detected in the next step S342, the process proceeds to the next step S343.
In step S343, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a return request command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S344.
In step S344, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process waits for the return repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the return request command).

Then, when the return repeat command is received (the transmitted return request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the payout control board 100 has received an ACK response to the return request command. End the process according to the flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process returns to the process of step S211 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, the return request command is not received (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the return request command was transmitted in step S343, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process returns to step S343, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the return request command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the return process in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 21 will be described.
In step S441, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a return request command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the return request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S442, and the payout control board 100 transmits the return repeat command to the main control board 50 (the received return request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is). Execute (ACK response of return request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the flow of power-on processing in the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
In FIG. 22, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the power-on process 2 in the payout control board 100, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the power-on process in the management device 200. Further, in FIG. 22, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 during the power-on process.
When the power of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 is turned on, the program on the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 is started, and the program on the management device 200 is started. At this time, the power-on process is executed on the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10, and the power-on process is executed on the management device 200.

Here, the power-on process 1 on the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 14 and the power-on process 2 on the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 22 are both performed on the payout control board 100 when the power is turned on. It is a process to be executed, and some processes are duplicated. Then, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
However, in the power-on process 1 of the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 14, the processes necessary for explaining the transmission / reception of commands between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are extracted and illustrated. , The illustration of other processes is omitted.
On the other hand, in the power-on process 2 of the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 22, a process necessary for explaining the transmission / reception of a command between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 is extracted and shown in FIG. It is shown, and the illustration of other processes is omitted.

First, the power-on process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 22 will be described.
In step S401, the payout control board 100 executes the initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S502. Note that step S401 in FIG. 22 and step S401 in FIG. 14 are processes having the same contents.
Proceeding to step S502, the payout control board 100 executes a process of sequentially transmitting the CPU-specific IDs 1st to 4th bytes to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S503.
In step S503, the main control board 50 executes a determination process of whether or not the transmission of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID is completed. Then, when it is determined that the transmission of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID is completed, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transmission of the 4th byte of the CPU-specific ID has not been completed, the process returns to step S502, and the payout control board 100 again transfers the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU-specific ID to the payout control board 100. Executes the process of sequentially transmitting.

Next, the power-on process in the management device 200 shown on the right side in FIG. 22 will be described.
In step S601, the management device 200 executes the initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S602.
In step S602, the management device 200 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID transmitted from the payout control board 100. Then, when the CPU-specific ID 1st to 4th bytes are received, the process proceeds to the next step S603, and the management device 200 executes a process of determining whether or not the received command is the CPU-specific ID.

Here, when it is determined in step S603 that the received command is the CPU-specific ID, the process proceeds to the next step S604, and the management device 200 stores the received CPU-specific IDs 1st to 4th bytes in a predetermined storage area. Executes the process of storing (saving) in. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S605.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S603 that the received command is not the CPU unique ID, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding to step S605, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the reception of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID is completed.
Then, when it is determined in step S605 that the reception of the fourth byte of the CPU-specific ID is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S606, and the management device 200 transmits the first to fourth bytes of the CPU-specific ID to the hall computer 300. Execute the process. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S605 that the reception of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID has not been completed, step S606 is skipped and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the flow of lending processing in the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
In FIG. 23, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the lending process 2 in the payout control board 100, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the lending process in the management device 200. Further, in FIG. 23, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 during the lending process.

Here, the lending process 1 on the payout control board 100 shown in FIG. 11 and the lending process 2 on the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 23 both show a subroutine of the lending process in step S119 of FIG. Therefore, some processes are duplicated. Then, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
However, in the lending process 1 of the payout control board 100 shown in FIG. 11, the process at the time of the lending process is illustrated in detail.
On the other hand, in the lending process 2 of the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 23, the processes necessary for explaining the transmission / reception of commands between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are extracted and illustrated. , The illustration of other processes is omitted.

First, the lending process in the management device 200 shown on the right side in FIG. 23 will be described.
When the operation (ON) of the lending switch 202 is detected in step S611, the process proceeds to the next step S612, and the management device 200 disables (cannot accept) the process of turning off the lending enable LED and the operation of the lending switch 202. And the process of invalidating (not accepting) the operation of the return switch 203 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S613.
The lending allowed LED is an LED indicating whether or not the electronic medal can be rented, and when it is lit, it indicates that the electronic medal can be rented, and when it is turned off, the electronic medal cannot be rented. Is shown.

Proceeding to step S613, the management device 200 transmits a lending request command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S614.
In step S614, the management device 200 executes the response standby process. This process waits for the lending repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the lending request command).

Then, when the loan repeat command is received (the transmitted loan request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the management device 200 determines that the payout control board 100 has received an ACK response to the loan request command, and next The process proceeds to step S615.
Further, when an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (there is a NAK response), the process proceeds to step S617.
Furthermore, if the loan repeat command is not received (time-out occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the loan request command was transmitted in step S613, the process proceeds to step S618, and the management device 200 executes error processing.

Proceeding to step S615, the management device 200 transmits a lending instruction command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 616.
In step S616, the management device 200 executes a process of subtracting the number of loaned sheets. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S617.
Proceeding to step S617, the management device 200 performs a process of turning on the lending available LED, a process of enabling (accepting) the operation of the lending switch 202, and a process of enabling (accepting) the operation of the return switch 203. Run. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Next, the lending process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 23 will be described.
In step S511, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a lending request command transmitted from the management device 200. Then, when the loan request command is received, the process proceeds to step S118.

Proceeding to step S118, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the received command is a loan request command. Note that step S118 in FIG. 23 and step S118 in FIG. 8 are processes having the same contents.
Here, when it is determined that the received command is a lending request command, the process proceeds to step S513, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of storing (storing) the received lending request command in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 103. do. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S514.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not the lending request command, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Proceeding to step S514, the payout control board 100 credits whether or not the loan request can be accepted, specifically, by adding the number of loans (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the loan request command) to the number of credits. Executes the process of determining whether or not the upper limit of the number is exceeded.
Here, in step S514, when it is determined that the loan request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of loans is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of credits even if the number of loans is added to the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S161. The payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a lending repeat command to the management device 200 (sending the received lending request command back to the management device 200 as it is) (ACK response of the lending request command). Then, the process proceeds to step S164.

On the other hand, in step S514, when it is determined that the loan request cannot be accepted, that is, when it is determined that adding the number of loans to the number of credits exceeds the upper limit of the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S515 to control the withdrawal. The board 100 transmits an error command to the management device 200 (NAK response). Then, the process proceeds to step S169, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of setting an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Proceeding to step S164, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a lending instruction command has been received.
Here, when it is determined in step S164 that the loan instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step S167, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the number of loans to the number of credits. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S164 that the lending instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S169, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of setting an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
It should be noted that steps S161, S164, S167 and S169 in FIG. 23 and steps S161, S164, S167 and S169 in FIG. 11 are the same processing.

24 and 25 are flowcharts showing the flow of counting processing in the payout control board 100 and the management device 200. FIG. 25 is a flowchart following FIG. 24.
In FIGS. 24 and 25, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of counting processing in the payout control board 100, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of counting processing in the management device 200. Further, in FIGS. 24 and 25, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 during the counting process.

Here, the counting process 1 on the payout control board 100 shown in FIG. 12 and the counting process 2 on the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIGS. 24 and 25 are both subroutines of the counting process in step S117 of FIG. Is shown, and some processes are duplicated. Then, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
However, in the counting process 1 on the payout control board 100 shown in FIG. 12, the processing at the time of the counting process is shown in detail.
On the other hand, in the counting process 2 on the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIGS. 24 and 25, the processes necessary for explaining the transmission / reception of commands between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are extracted. The illustration of other processes is omitted.

First, the counting process on the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIGS. 24 and 25 will be described.
In step S181, the payout control board 100 transmits a lower count request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to step S533.
In step S533, the payout control board 100 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the lower count repeat command to be transmitted from the management device 200 (ACK response of the lower count request command).

Then, when the lower count repeat command is received (the transmitted lower count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the payout control board 100 determines that the management device 200 has ACKed the lower count request command. The process proceeds to step S185.
Further, when an error command is transmitted from the management device 200 (there is a NAK response), the process according to this flowchart ends.
Furthermore, if the lower count repeat command is not received (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the lower count request command was transmitted in step S181, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets an error flag. Execute the process to set. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Proceeding to step S185, the payout control board 100 transmits a higher count request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to step S535 of FIG.
In step S535, the payout control board 100 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the upper count repeat command to be transmitted from the management device 200 (ACK response of the upper count request command).

Then, when the higher count repeat command is received (the transmitted higher count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the payout control board 100 determines that the management device 200 has received an ACK response to the higher count request command. The process proceeds to step S189.
On the other hand, an error command is transmitted from the management device 200 (there is a NAK response), or the upper count repeat command is issued even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the upper count request command was transmitted in step S185 of FIG. If no command is received (timeout occurs), the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of setting an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
The error processing in step S538 in FIG. 24 and the error processing in step S538 in FIG. 25 are the same processing.

When the process proceeds to step S189, the payout control board 100 transmits a counting instruction command to the management device 200, and proceeds to step S191.
In step S191, a process of clearing the number of credits (setting to "0") is executed. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
It should be noted that steps S181, S185, S189, S191 and S194 in FIGS. 24 and 25 and steps S181, S185, S189, S191 and S194 in FIG. 12 have the same processing.

Next, the counting process in the management device 200 shown on the right side in FIGS. 24 and 25 will be described.
In step S631, the management device 200 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a lower count request command transmitted from the payout control board 100. Then, when the lower count request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S632.

Proceeding to step S632, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a lower count request command.
Here, when it is determined in step S632 that the received command is a lower count request command, the process proceeds to the next step S633, and the management device 200 stores (saves) the received lower count request command in a predetermined storage area. ) Execute the process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S634.
On the other hand, in step S632, when it is determined that the received command is not a lower count request command, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding to step S634, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the counting (refund) request can be accepted.
Here, when it is determined in step S634 that the counting (refund) request can be accepted, the process proceeds to step S636, and the management device 200 invalidates (accepts) the process of turning off the lending available LED and the operation of the lending switch 202. The process of disabling) and the process of disabling (not accepting) the operation of the return switch 203 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S637.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S634 that the counting (refund) request cannot be accepted, the process proceeds to step S635, and the management device 200 transmits an error command to the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Proceeding to step S637, the management device 200 executes a process of transmitting the lower count repeat command to the payout control board 100 (sending the received lower count request command back to the payout control board 100 as it is) (ACK of the lower count request command). response). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S638.
In step S638, the management device 200 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a higher count request command transmitted from the payout control board 100. Then, when the higher count request command is received, the process proceeds to step S639 of FIG.

Proceeding to step S639, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a higher count request command.
Here, when it is determined in step S639 that the received command is a higher count request command, the process proceeds to step S641, and the management device 200 stores (saves) the received higher count request command in a predetermined storage area. Execute the process. Then, the process proceeds to step S642.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S639 that the received command is not the higher count request command, the process proceeds to step S640, and the management device 200 transmits an error command to the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process proceeds to step S647, and the management device 200 executes error processing.

Proceeding to step S642, the management device 200 executes a process of transmitting the higher count repeat command to the payout control board 100 (sending the received higher count request command back to the payout control board 100 as it is) (ACK response). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S643.
In step S643, the management device 200 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a counting instruction command transmitted from the payout control board 100. Then, when the counting instruction command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S644.

Proceeding to step S644, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a counting instruction command.
Here, when it is determined that the received command is a counting instruction command, the process proceeds to the next step S645, and the management device 200 determines the number of refunds specified from the lower counting request command and the upper counting request command. Execute the process to reflect on the number of electronic medals managed by the side. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S646.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not a counting instruction command, the process proceeds to step S647, and the management device 200 executes error processing.

Proceeding to step S646, the management device 200 performs a process of turning on the lending available LED, a process of enabling (accepting) the operation of the lending switch 202, and a process of enabling (accepting) the operation of the return switch 203. Run. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing waveforms of data signals and strobe signals for serial communication between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
In FIGS. 23 to 25, a lending request command, a lower count request command, a higher count request command, and the like are shown as commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, and these commands are described above. As described above, it is composed of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a succeeding command (lower 8 bits).

Then, in FIG. 26, the waveforms of the data signal and the strobe signal are shown with the preceding command and the succeeding command constituting these commands as one unit.
As shown in FIG. 26, a data signal is transmitted bit by bit from D0 bit (DB0) to D7 bit (DB7) between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, and the strobe signal is turned on at the same time. I am trying to read one bit at a time.

FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing on / off of each signal at the time of lending an electronic medal.
FIG. 23 shows commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when the electronic medal is rented, and FIG. 27 shows each signal of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when the electronic medal is rented. Indicates the on / off timing.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the power of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 is turned on, the operation of the return switch 203 of the management device 200 can be accepted thereafter.
After that, the data signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 of the slot machine 10 become "0", and the strobe signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 of the slot machine 10 are turned off.
After that, the operation of the rental switch 202 of the management device 200 becomes acceptable, and the operating state changes from the standby state to the normal state. The normal state means a state in which the management device 200 can lend an electronic medal and the slot machine 10 can proceed with the game.

Then, when the operation (ON) of the rental switch 202 of the management device 200 is detected, the operation of the rental switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 becomes unacceptable, and then the slot machine 10 from the management device 200. The preceding command and the succeeding command of the lending request command are sequentially transmitted to the payout control board 100.
After that, the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 sequentially transmits the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lending / repeating command to the management device 200.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lending instruction command are sequentially transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10.
Then, when the transmission of the lending instruction command is completed, the operations of the lending switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 can be accepted.

FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing on / off of each signal at the time of electronic medal counting (refund).
24 and 25 show commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when counting electronic medals, but FIG. 28 shows the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when counting electronic medals. The on / off timing of each signal is shown.

As shown in FIG. 28, when the power of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 is turned on, the operation of the return switch 203 of the management device 200 can be accepted thereafter.
After that, the data signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 of the slot machine 10 become "0", and the strobe signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 of the slot machine 10 are turned off.
After that, the operation of the rental switch 202 of the management device 200 becomes acceptable, and the operating state changes from the standby state to the normal state. Up to this point, it is the same as in FIG. 27.

When the operation (ON) of the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10 is detected, the operation of the lending switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 becomes unacceptable, and then the payout control board of the slot machine 10 becomes unacceptable. The preceding command and the succeeding command of the lower count request command are sequentially transmitted from 100 to the management device 200.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lower count repeat command are sequentially transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10.

After that, the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 sequentially transmits the preceding command and the succeeding command of the upper count request command to the management device 200.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the upper count repeat command are sequentially transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the counting instruction command are sequentially transmitted from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200.
Then, when the transmission of the counting instruction command is completed, the operations of the lending switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 can be accepted.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the present embodiment, the various commands shown in FIGS. 4 to 7 are composed of 16-bit data consisting of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a succeeding command (lower 8 bits). Not limited to this, for example, it may be 8 bits or 32 bits.

(2) In the present embodiment, commands are transmitted and received by serial communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, parallel communication may be used, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.
(3) In the present embodiment, the main control board 50 transmits the one-sheet insertion request command to the payout control board 100 three times when the 3-bet switch 40b is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The three-sheet insertion request command may be transmitted once.

(4) In the present embodiment, the main control board 50 transmits a payout request command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, but the payout request command is not limited to this, and all reels are not limited to this. 31 When stopped, a payout request command may be sent.
(5) In the present embodiment, the number of payouts of the main control board 50 is "0" with respect to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off even when the winning combination is not won. The payout request command is sent, but the payout request command is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to send the payout request command when the winning combination is not won.

(6) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example as one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "rotating gaming machine" installed in the No. 4 branch office to which the Fuei Law is applied. It is not limited to (so-called "pachislot gaming machine"), and can be applied to, for example, a casino machine. Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine.
(7) All the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Second Embodiment>
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is a medalless gaming machine that does not use medals as tangible objects, as in the first embodiment.
Here, "medalless" in the title of "medalless gaming machine" means that a medal as a tangible object is not used.
Therefore, even in the case of a "medalless gaming machine", the use of the gaming medium (game value) used for the game is the same as that of the conventional gaming machine, and the gaming medium used for the game in the medalless gaming machine is also used. Sometimes referred to simply as a "medal."
Therefore, the term "medal" is not limited to a medal as a tangible object, but may also refer to a medal as an intangible object (for example, electronic data).
Further, the medal as an intangible object may be referred to as a game medium, a game value, a score (or simply "point"), an electronic medal, electronic data, electronic information, an electronic game medium, an electronic game value, or the like. In the following description of the second embodiment, the "medal" as an intangible object used in the gaming machine 10 (medalless gaming machine) is referred to as a "game medium".

The “rental” means transmitting the game medium necessary for the game from the rental unit 200 to the game machine 10.
“Credit” means storing (storing, crediting) a game medium in the game machine 10. The "credited game medium" corresponds to the data stored in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100.
"Bet" means betting a game medium in order to play a game. When the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a or 3-bet switch 40b) is operated, a predetermined number of game media are bet from the game media corresponding to the data stored in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100.
A "bet" is also referred to as an "injection". Note that "insertion" does not only mean inserting an actual medal into the game machine from the medal insertion slot, but also includes betting a game medium (electronic medal) by operating the bet switch 40.

The "payment" means returning the bet game medium to the RWM 103 (credit) of the game medium number control board 100, and is performed by operating the checkout switch 46. "Payment" may be referred to as "return" or "cancellation". Therefore, the "payment switch 46" may be referred to as a "return switch 46" or a "cancel switch 46".
When the bet switch 40 is operated while the game medium is stored (credited) as data in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100, a predetermined number of game media are bet (added as the number of bets). , The data (number of credits) of the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is subtracted by the number bet. On the other hand, when the settlement switch 46 is operated in a situation where the game medium is bet, the number of bets up to that point (the number of game media) becomes "0", and the number of bets up to that point is controlled by the number of game media. It is added to the RWM 103 of the board 100 (returned to credit).

“Granting” means adding the number of game media corresponding to the payout of the winning combination to the number of credits stored in the game machine 10 based on the winning combination.
"Grant" is also referred to as "payout". Note that "payout" does not only mean ejecting the actual medal from the medal return port, but also refers to the number of game media stored in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 at the time of winning a small winning combination. The process of adding the number of game media corresponding to the winning of a small winning combination is also included in the "payout (processing)".
In the second embodiment, the "payout means 67" in the first embodiment is referred to as "granting number control means 67".
“Counting” means returning the (credited) gaming medium stored in the gaming machine 10 (RWM103 of the gaming medium number control board 100) to the lending unit 200, and is performed by operating the counting switch 47. Will be. When the counting switch 47 is operated, a predetermined number of gaming media stored in the gaming machine 10 are subtracted, and the subtracted gaming media are added to the lending unit 300 side.

The "return" of the game medium from the rental unit 200 means that the number of game media stored in the rental unit 200 is stored in the game medium number storage medium (magnetic card, IC card, IC coin, etc.) and externally (the magnetic card, IC card, IC coin, etc.). It means to discharge to the player). A reader / writer is used when the number of game media stored in the lending unit 200 is stored in the number of game media storage media (the lending unit 200 has a built-in reader / writer).
As described above, it has been explained that "payment" may be referred to as "return", but when "return" is used in the second embodiment, the number of game media stored in the rental unit 200 is used as the game medium. Number of media It means to store in a storage medium and discharge it to the outside (player).

Each digit of the LED such as the set value display means 73 and the role ratio monitor 113 used in the second embodiment is composed of seven segments. The "7-segment" has a DP (decimal point) segment in addition to the seven-segment elements.

"Notification" corresponds to transmitting (outputting) a telegram from the gaming machine 10 to the lending unit 200, or from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10, and is synonymous with "transmission" and "output". be.
In the following, for example, the gaming machine information notification may be referred to as "transmitting", or the gaming machine information may be referred to as "notifying", for example.

At least a part of the storage area of the RWM or ROM may be referred to as a "storage area" or a "storage means", both of which are synonymous.
Further, the control board (main, sub, etc.) may be referred to as "control means". Further, the CPU may be referred to as a "control means".

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the gaming machine 10 (slot machine) according to the second embodiment. In the first embodiment, it is referred to as "slot machine 10", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "game machine 10".
Further, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "main control board 50", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "main control board 50". Similarly, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "sub-control board 80", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "sub-control board 80". However, the main control board may be referred to as a main control board, and the sub control board may be referred to as a sub control board (both have the same meaning).
Further, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "payout control board 100", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "game medium number control board 100". However, the game medium number control board may be referred to as a payout control board, and both have the same meaning.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "credit number display LED76", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "game medium number display unit 121". Both have the same function and consist of, for example, a 5-digit LED.
Further, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "acquired number display LED 78", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "granted number display unit 78". Both have the same function and are composed of, for example, two-digit LEDs.

When the main control board 50 is regarded as one of the main control boards, the game medium number control board 100 is the other one of the main control boards. Therefore, the RWM53, ROM54, and CPU55 of the main control board 50 may be referred to as the first main control RWM53, the first main control ROM54, and the first main control CPU 55, respectively.
Further, the RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 of the game medium number control board 100 may be referred to as a second main control RWM103, a second main control ROM 14, and a second main control CPU 105, respectively.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "management device (CR unit) 200", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "rental unit 200". Both have the same function. Further, the rental unit 200 may be referred to as a "dedicated unit 200".
One rental unit 200 is provided for one gaming machine 10. In other words, one rental unit 200 is a device dedicated to one gaming machine 10.
On the other hand, the hall computer 300 electrically connected to the rental unit 200 may be provided for each rental unit 200, or even if one hall computer 300 is provided for each of the plurality of rental units 200. good.
Similarly, the management computer 400 electrically connected to the lending unit 200 may be provided for each lending unit 200 (the lending unit 200 and the management computer 400 may be connected one-to-one). Alternatively, one management computer 400 may be provided for each of the plurality of rental units 200.

The hall computer 300 is a computer for collecting data for hall business. For example, the number of games played on the day, the number of ins (inputs), the number of outs (granted), the number of MYs (differences, the number of differences), the number of operation of the accessory, the number of loans, etc. are totaled.
The management computer 400 is a computer for transmitting information to the outside (for example, an external center outside the hall). The management computer 400 is also installed in the hall in the same manner as the hall computer 300.
In FIG. 29, the hall computer 300 and the management computer 400 are provided separately, but a computer in which these are integrated may be used.

In the main control board 50, a bet number storage means 53a and a grant number storage means 53b are provided as a part of the storage area of the RWM 53.
The bet number storage means 53a stores the current number of bets.
On the other hand, the bet number display unit 77 is connected to the main control board 50. The bet number display unit 77 is a device that displays the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a, and is composed of, for example, a two-digit LED.
Further, the grant number storage means 53b stores the number of grants of the game media when a predetermined number of game media are granted based on the winning of the small winning combination.
On the other hand, the granting number display unit 78 is connected to the main control board 50. The grant number display unit 78 is a device that displays the grant number stored in the grant number storage means 53b, and is composed of, for example, a two-digit LED.

Furthermore, although not shown in the first embodiment (FIG. 1), the set value display means 73 is mounted on the main control board 50. The set value display means 73 is composed of, for example, a one-digit LED, and can display the current set value in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, the role ratio monitor 113, which will be described later, is mounted not on the main control board 50 but on the game medium number control board 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the role ratio monitor 113 may be mounted on the main control board 50.

The game medium number control board 100 includes a second main control board (means), a payout control board (means), a medal number control board (means), a medal number display control board (means), or a game medium number display control board (means). ) Etc. Like the main control board 50, the game medium number control board 100 is required to have security for fraud prevention. Therefore, the board case is opened by being housed in the board case and sealed by caulking (sealing member). (Access to the game medium number control board 100) is configured to be difficult.

The game medium number control board 100 includes independent RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105, similarly to the main control board 50. These RWM103, ROM104, and CPU105 may be built in one chip. The game medium number control board 100 can control the display of the game medium number display unit 121, transmit information to the rental unit 200 via the connection terminal plate 130, or send information from the rental unit 200 via the connection terminal plate 130. Is configured to be receivable. Further, it is configured so that information can be transmitted to the main control board 50 and information can be received from the main control board 50. In FIG. 29, the direction of the arrow between the substrates indicates the information transmission / reception direction. Therefore, the main control board 50 and the game medium number control board 100 are configured to enable bidirectional communication.

In FIG. 29, the main control board 50 and the game medium number control board 100 are made of separate bodies, but it is also possible to make one main control board. However, also in this case, the first main control RWM53, the first main control ROM 54, the first main control CPU 55, the second main control RWM103, the second main control ROM 104, and the second main control CPU 105 are provided on one board. become.

The RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 includes a game medium number storage means 103a (also referred to as a “game medium number storage area (_NB_MEDAL)”) for storing the number of game media (credits). When the game medium is given by winning a small winning combination, the number of game media (data) of the game medium number storage means 103a is updated (added).
Further, when the game medium is bet to start the game, the game medium (data) of the game medium number storage means 103a is updated (subtracted) by the number of game media corresponding to the number of bets.

Further, the game medium number display board 120 is electrically connected to the game medium number control board 100. A game medium number display unit 121 is mounted on the game medium number display board 120. The game medium number display unit 121 displays the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and is composed of, for example, a 5-digit LED.
For example, it is assumed that "100" is stored as the number of game media in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this case, "100" is displayed on the game medium number display unit 121.

When the 3-bet switch 40b is operated to start the game, the bet operation signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100. The game medium number control board 100 determines whether or not the bet is possible based on the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and when it is determined that the bet is possible, the main control A bet signal is transmitted to the board 50. Upon receiving the bet signal, the main control board 50 executes the bet process and stores the bet number in the bet number storage means 53a. When the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is updated from "0" to "3", the display (last digit) of the bet number display unit 77 is also updated from "0" to "3".

Further, when the bet signal is transmitted to the main control board 50 as described above, the game medium number control board 100 updates the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this example, the number of game media is updated from "100" to "97". When the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated from "100" to "97", the display of the game medium number display unit 121 is also updated from "100" to "97".

A checkout switch 46 is connected to the main control board 50. The settlement switch 46 is a switch that is operated when the bet game medium is returned (in other words, the number of bets is set to "0").
In a situation where the bet number is stored in the bet number storage means 53a and the bet number is displayed on the bet number display unit 77, the settlement switch 46 is operated before the start switch 41 is operated (before the game is started). If so, the number of bets will be returned (returned).
For example, as in the above example, when the settlement switch 46 is operated in a situation where "3" is stored in the bet number storage means 53a and "97" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, The number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is updated from "3" to "0". As a result, the display of the bet number display unit 77 is updated from "3" to "0".

Further, based on the operation of the settlement switch 46, a settlement signal (a signal corresponding to returning the bet number "3") is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100. Upon receiving this settlement signal, the game medium number control board 100 updates the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a from "97" to "100". As a result, the display of the game medium number display unit 121 is updated from "97" to "100".

In this way, the settlement switch 46 is used when the bet game medium is returned to the original state (the number of bets is set to "0"). Therefore, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is not subtracted.
Further, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated in a situation where the bet number is not stored in the bet number storage means 53a, the bet number stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "0" and the game is played. The number of game media stored in the medium number storage means 103a remains the same.
In order to start such a settlement process, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 46 is operated, and if the settlement switch 46 is not operated, the settlement process is not started and the settlement switch 46 is operated. In this case, it is determined whether or not the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is “0”. Further, if the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "0", the settlement process is not started, and if the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is not "0", the settlement process is not started. Is configured to start.
As a result, when comparing the situation in which the settlement switch 46 is operated and the situation in which the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "0", the situation in which the settlement switch 46 is operated Is relatively small, so it is possible to reduce the processing load by first determining whether or not the settlement switch 46 is being operated.

When the start switch 41 is operated while the number of bets is "3", the number of bets in the game is fixed and the game is started (the rotation of the reel 31 is started). In this case, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a may be cleared when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), or may be cleared when all reels 31 are stopped. When the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is cleared, the display of the bet number display unit 77 is also updated to "0".

In the game, for example, when a small winning combination with a grant number of "8" wins, the main control board 50 stores "8" in the grant number storage means 53b. When the value stored in the grant number storage means 53b is updated to "8", the display (last digit) of the grant number display unit 78 is also updated from "0" to "8".
Further, when the game medium is given, the grant (payout) signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100. When the game medium number control board 100 receives the grant signal, the game medium number control board 100 adds the number of game media corresponding to the grant signal to the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this example, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated from "97" to "105". When the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated from "97" to "105", the display of the game medium number display unit 121 is also updated from "97" to "105".

Further, after the number of grants is stored in the number of grants storage means 53b, the number of grants is stored when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated (at the start of the game), when all reels 31 of the next game are stopped, or the like. Clear the number of grants stored in 53b. When the number of grants stored in the number of grants storage means 53b is cleared, the display of the number of grants display unit 78 is also updated to "0".

The number of game media display units 121 is configured to display error information corresponding to the error that has occurred.
In this case, the error information may be displayed instead of the number of game media displayed on the number of game media display unit 121, but the number of game media and the error information may be displayed alternately. For example, the number of game media may be displayed in "3" seconds → the error information may be displayed in "3" seconds → the number of game media may be displayed in "3" seconds → ... When the game medium number display unit 121 is composed of 5-digit LEDs and the error information to be displayed is, for example, "E1", "000E1", "--- E1", "E1000", " It may be displayed as "E1---" or the like.

Here, when the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred is not displayed on the game medium number display unit 121, the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred may be displayed on the grant number display unit 78. In this case, the error information may be displayed on the grant number display unit 78 after the number of granted game media is displayed. For example, as described above, when the number of grants is "8", "00"-> "01"-> "02"-> ... "07"-> "08" is displayed on the grant number display unit 78 (count). After (up), there is a mode in which "E1" (an example of an error code) is displayed.

The counting switch 47 is electrically connected to the game medium number control board 100. Although not shown, the counting switch 47 is provided on the control panel of the gaming machine 10 or the like, like the betting switch 40 or the like, for example.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, the game medium (information) stored in the game medium number storage means 103a can be transmitted to the rental unit 200 via the connection terminal plate 130. For example, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the number of gaming media "200" is stored in the gaming medium number storage means 103a, the information "200" is transmitted to the connection terminal plate 130 as the counting value. After that, the lending unit 200 is configured so that the information "200" can be transmitted as a counting value. Then, after the counting switch 47 is operated and the counting value is transmitted, the game medium number storage means 103a is configured to store "0".

Further, in a situation where "200" is displayed on the game medium number display unit 121 before the counting switch 47 is operated, the counting switch 47 is operated and the lending unit 200 is informed that the counting value is "200". Is transmitted, the display of the game medium number display unit 121 is updated to "0".

The game medium number control board 100 is provided with a total game medium number clear switch 112. When the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated, the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100 can be cleared (“0” is stored). .. When the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is cleared, the number of game media displayed on the game medium number display unit 121 is also updated to "0".
The information cleared by operating the total number of game media number clear switch 112 is only the total number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and other information is not cleared.

For example, when the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "3" and the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "1000", the total number of game media number clear switch. When 112 is operated, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "3", but the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a becomes "0". In other words, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is not cleared by operating the total number of game media number clear switch 112.
Similarly, "50" is stored as the number of rentable game media in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200, and the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is ". When the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated when the number is "1000", the number of rentable game media stored in the rentable game media number storage means 206 remains "50", but the game media The number of game media stored in the number storage means 103a is "0". In other words, the number of rentable game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is not cleared by operating the total number of game media number clear switch 112.

The operation method of the total number of game media clear switch 112 may be to press it once, to press and hold it for a predetermined time, or to turn on the power while it is being pressed. The total number of gaming media clear switch 112 is arranged at a position where the player cannot operate, for example, on the number of gaming media control board 100, inside the housing of the gaming machine 10, the back of the front door of the gaming machine 10, and the like. ing.
When the total number of game media is cleared by operating the total number of game media clear switch 112, the total number of game media clear status is turned on, and the total number of game media clear status is kept on until one game is completed. , Turn off the total number of game media clear status after the end of the one game.
Information on the total number of game media clear status may be transmitted to the rental unit 200. When the lending unit 200 receives the information that the total number of gaming media clear status is ON, the total number of gaming media stored in the lending unit 200 is cleared. Further, when the rental game medium is given from the rental unit 200 while the total number of game media clear status is ON in the game machine 10, the total number of game media clear status remains ON and a new game medium number storage means is used. The number of rental gaming media is added to 103a.

Further, the total number of game media clear switch 112 is invalid even if it is operated during the game, and is effective when the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated during the game standby (before the start of the game or after the end of the game). Become. In this case, the game medium number control board 100 determines whether or not the game is in progress based on the game start information and the game end information transmitted from the main control board 50, and the total game medium when the game is in progress. The operation of the number clear switch 112 is invalidated.

However, the total number of game media clear switch 112 may be enabled by the operation during the game. In this case, the total number of game media clear status is turned from on to off based on the end of the next game of the game in which the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated. In other words, at the end of the game in which the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated, the total number of game media clear status is kept on, and when the next game is finished, the total number of game media clear status is turned off. As a result, even at the timing when the total number of game media clear status is turned on for a short time (the timing when the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated immediately before the end of the game), the total number of game media clear status is set to the next game. Since it can be kept on, it is possible to suppress fraud such as clearing the total number of game media.

The total number of game media clear status may be turned off after the game in which the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated is completed. In this case, the program for updating the total number of game media clear status is standardized. Capacity can be reduced.

The combination ratio monitor 113 displays a predetermined ratio, and is composed of, for example, a 4-digit LED (7 segments (with DP segment)). In the second embodiment, the interrupt period of the game medium number control board 100 is set to "1" ms. The interrupt period of the main control board 50 is "2.235" ms.
Then, four interrupts become one cycle, and the four-digit LED of the role ratio monitor 113 is dynamically lit. Specifically, for example, an LED display counter is provided, and for each interrupt,
"00000001 (B)"
"00000010 (B)"
"000000100 (B)"
"00001000 (B)"
Is configured to circulate.

Then, when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)", the LED in the first place of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (the other LEDs are turned off), and when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", it is possible to turn on the LED. The tens LED of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (other LEDs are off), and when the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)", the hundreds LED of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (others). LED is turned off), and when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)", the LED of the thousandth place of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (the other LEDs are turned off).

Of the four LEDs constituting the role ratio monitor 113, the two LEDs on the left side (thousands and hundreds) are referred to as "identification segments" and display the information type. Further, the two LEDs on the right side (tens and ones digit) are referred to as "ratio segment" and display the calculated ratio.
Then, in the second embodiment, the combination ratio monitor 113 repeatedly displays the following six items (1) to (6) as ratios at predetermined time intervals.
(1) Instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) Or advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.)
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
(3) Character ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
(5) Character ratio (cumulative) (7A.)
(6) Ratio of status of accessories, etc. (cumulative) (5H.)

When displaying either ratio by the identification segment or the ratio segment, the DP segment at the first place of the identification segment is lit to clarify the boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment. At this time, each DP segment of the tens digit of the identification segment, the tens digit of the ratio segment, and the ones digit is not lit.
In the above notation, for example, "P." means that "P" is displayed by the 7-segment of the first digit of the identification segment and the DP segment of the 7-segment is lit.

For example, in the case of displaying the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative), when the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7P." Indicating the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment. "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative" refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been continuously counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the numbers are counted until at least the number of "175000" games is reached.
Even after the number of games is "175000" or more, the addition is continued until a value (upper limit value) that can be stored in the storage area of the predetermined address of the RWM 103 is reached.
Further, "6000 games" is the total number of games in which one set is "400" and the 15 sets are totaled.

The ratio of the above six items will be described below.
(1) Ratio of instructed accessories (cumulative)
The "instructed bonus ratio (cumulative)" is the cumulative number of grants (the "grant number" refers to the number of game media granted; the same shall apply hereinafter) as the denominator of the bonuses (RB, CB, SB). It is a ratio with the sum of the cumulative number of bonuses given at the time of operation and the cumulative number of instructions given by the operation of the instruction function as the numerator.
In addition, the above-mentioned "total" is first, when a storage area for storing the number of grants when the accessory is operated and a storage area for storing the number of designated grants are separately provided, both storage areas are used. Corresponds to the total value of the values stored in. Secondly, one storage area (instruction-included accessory) for storing both the number of grants when the accessory is activated and the number of grants when the instruction function is activated (hereinafter, referred to as "number of instruction-included accessories"). When a counter) is provided, it corresponds to the value of the one storage area.

For example, if the number of games played is "175,000" or more, the cumulative number of grants is "200,000", and the cumulative number of bonuses given is "100,000", the ratio of bonuses with instructions is calculated as "50". Will be done. The "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "1677215"), or if the total number of games is added to the number of games played this time and the upper limit is exceeded. In the subsequent games, the total number of grants, the total number of grants when the accessory is activated, and the total number of instructions granted are not updated.

Further, the "operation of the instruction function" is to obtain an advantageous game result in the game in which the lottery result of the winning combination (winning number) in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is obtained. It corresponds to a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified (instructed). For example, it corresponds to a game in which the correct push order is notified when the so-called push order bell is won.
In the gaming machine 10 not equipped with the accessory, the "instruction-included accessory ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the cumulative number of instructions given by the operation of the instruction function by the total number of grants.

Regarding the "number of grants in the game in which the instruction function is activated", for example, the number of grants "15" is small based on the fact that the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated. When a winning combination is won, "15" is added to the number of designated winnings and the total number of winnings.
On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order. Add "3" to the number of grants and the total number of grants.
In addition, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order, an instruction-included accessory is given. The number and the total number of grants will be the same as the previous game.

In the game in which the instruction function is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order. By executing the process of adding "", the value of both grant numbers (counters) may be the same as that of the previous game.

(2) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative)
The "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the cumulative number of games played is used as the denominator and the total number of games played in the advantageous section is used as the numerator. For example, when the cumulative number of games played is "20,000" and the cumulative number of advantageous section games is "18,000", the advantageous section ratio is calculated as "90".
The "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "65535"), the cumulative number of games and the number of advantageous section games are not updated in the subsequent games. There is.
Either of the above-mentioned "instructed accessory ratio (cumulative)" or "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" is displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, in a gaming machine equipped with an instruction function, the "instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, and the "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" does not need to be displayed. On the other hand, in a gaming machine not equipped with an instruction function, the "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, and the "instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative)" is not displayed.

(3) Continuous character ratio (6000 games), continuous character ratio (cumulative)
The "continuous bonus ratio (6000 games)" is a ratio in which the number of grants when the number of games is "6000" is the denominator, and the number of grants when the continuous bonus (RB) is activated is the numerator of the number of games "6000". be.
Further, the "continuous bonus ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the number of grants in the cumulative number of games is the denominator and the number of grants in the cumulative number of games is the numerator. For example, when the cumulative number of games played is a predetermined number of times (for example, 17,500 times) or more, the total number of games granted is "20,000", and the total number of games granted when the continuous bonus is activated is "10000". , The continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) is calculated as "50".
The "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "65535"), or if the total number of grants is added to the number of grants for this game and the upper limit is exceeded. In the subsequent games, the cumulative number of grants and the cumulative number of game media granted when the continuous accessory is activated are not updated.

(4) Character ratio (6000 games), character ratio (cumulative)
The "feature ratio (6000 games)" is defined by the number of grants when the number of games is "6000" as the denominator, and the number of grants when the bonuses (RB, CB, SB) are activated during the number of games "6000" as the numerator. The ratio.
In addition, the "role ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the number of grants in the cumulative number of games is the denominator, and the number of grants when the bonus (RB, CB, SB) is activated is the numerator in the total number of games. be. For example, when the cumulative number of games played is a predetermined number (for example, 17,500) or more, the cumulative number of grants is "20,000", and the cumulative number of grants when the bonus is activated is "10000", the bonus ratio (Cumulative) is calculated as "50".
The "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "65535"), or if the total number of grants is added to the number of grants for this game and the upper limit is exceeded. In the subsequent games, the cumulative number of grants and the cumulative number of game media granted when the accessory is activated are not updated.

(5) Ratio of status of accessories, etc. (cumulative)
"Characteristic state ratio (cumulative)" is the number of games in which the bonus (RB, CB, SB) is operating, or the continuous bonus (1BB, 2BB) is operating, with the cumulative number of games as the denominator. It is a ratio with the number of games played as a numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of games played is "20,000" and the cumulative number of games played during the operation of the bonus or continuous bonus is "5000", the status ratio of the bonus (cumulative) is calculated as "25". NS.
The cumulative total is not necessarily the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "175000"), in the subsequent games, the cumulative number of games and the games during the operation of the accessory and the operation of the continuous accessory are performed. The number of times is configured so that it is not updated.

Further, in the above six items, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as “−−” on the gaming machine that does not have the function corresponding to the item.
For example, if "RB (Type 1 special character)" is not provided, there is no continuous character ratio, so "continuous character ratio (6000 games)" and "continuous character ratio (cumulative)". When is displayed, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "---".

Furthermore, as a result of calculating the ratio, if there is a decimal point, the decimal point is rounded down and displayed. For example, when the result of calculating the ratio is "49.99", it is displayed as "49".
Further, when the result of calculating the ratio is "100", it is displayed as "99".
If the ratio is less than "10" as a result of calculation, "0" is displayed in the tens place. Specifically, when the ratio is calculated to be "9"%, it is displayed as "09".

The identification segment and the ratio segment of the role ratio monitor 113 may be displayed in a blinking manner.
First, when the ratio is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the ratio segment is blinked and displayed.
The threshold value (%) of each ratio is as follows.
(1) Instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) or advantageous section ratio (cumulative): 70
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games): 60
(3) Character ratio (6000 games): 70
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative): 60
(5) Character ratio (cumulative): 70
(6) Ratio of status of accessories, etc. (cumulative): 50
Therefore, for example, when the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is "69", the ratio segment "69" is lit when the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed, but when it is "70", it is lit. Flashes.

Secondly, when the cumulative number of games is less than the standard number of games, the identification segment is blinked and displayed.
The standard number of games for each ratio is as follows.
(1) Instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) or advantageous section ratio (cumulative): 175000
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games): 6000
(3) Character ratio (6000 games): 6000
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative): 17500
(5) Character ratio (cumulative): 17500
(6) Ratio of status of accessories, etc. (cumulative): 175000

Therefore, for example, when the cumulative number of games is "6000", the identification segment (6y.) Is lit and displayed when the continuous winning combination ratio (6000 games) is displayed. On the other hand, for example, when the cumulative number of games is "5999", the identification segment (6y.) Is displayed blinking when the continuous winning combination ratio (6000 games) is displayed.
If the cumulative number of games is less than the number of games "400" per set of aggregation units, "00" is displayed in the ratio segment.

Furthermore, when blinking the identification segment or ratio segment, one blinking cycle consisting of a lighting time of "0.3" seconds and an extinguishing time of "0.3" seconds is set to "0.6" seconds, and the tolerance is set. It is preferably ± 10%.
In the second embodiment, switching between lighting and extinguishing in the blinking display is managed (controlled) as follows.
First, the RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching time (_TM_CHG_FLS)" (2 bytes) as a timer area for managing the blinking switching time.

The blinking switching time is initialized when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (“0” is stored), and “1” is added for each interrupt. As described above, one interrupt time is "1" ms. Further, the blinking switching time is configured to circulate from "0" to "299".
Further, the RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS)" (1 byte) as a flag for determining whether the light is on or off.
The blinking switching flag is initialized when the power is turned on (“0” is stored), and then “0” and “1” are switched every "300" ms. When it is "0", it means lighting, and when it is "1", it means "turning off".

In updating the blinking switching time, a process of subtracting "299" from the current timer value is performed. Specifically, it is as follows.
Example 1) If the update process is performed when the initial value is "0", it becomes "0-299 = 298". At this time, the carry flag is set to "1" because a carry occurs.
Example 2) If the update process is performed when the blinking switching time is "298", it becomes "298-299 = 1". At this time, the carry flag is set to "1" because a carry occurs.
Example 3) If the update process is performed when the blinking switching time is "299", it becomes "299-299 = 0". At this time, the carry flag is set to "0" because the carry flag does not occur.

Then, as a result of updating the blinking switching time, when the carry flag is "1", the blinking switching flag is not updated, and when the carry flag is "0", the blinking switching flag is updated. As a result, the blinking switching flag is switched every "300" ms. Specifically, it is as follows.
Example 1) When the blinking switching flag is "0" (lights up), it becomes "1" (lights off) when the update process is performed.
Example 2) When the blinking switching flag is "1" (lights off), it becomes "0" (lights up) when the update process is performed.

Furthermore, the combination monitor 113 displays a test pattern so that it can be confirmed whether or not the segment element of each LED operates normally.
The test pattern is "8.8." Until the number of times the above carry flag becomes "0" becomes "16" after the power is turned on, that is, until "300 ms x 16 times = 4800 ms" elapses. 8.8. ”(All segment elements of all LEDs (including segment DP)) is displayed.
Since each of the four-digit LEDs of the role ratio monitor 113 is dynamically lit every interrupt (1 ms), strictly speaking, not all four LEDs are lit at the same time.

After displaying the test pattern for "4800" ms, the display shifts to the above-mentioned (1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative) or indicated accessory ratio (cumulative) to (6) accessory state ratio (cumulative). , (1) to (6) are displayed for "4800" ms, respectively, and this is repeated.
Therefore,
Power on ↓
(0) Test pattern display (4800 ms)
↓
(1) Indication-included accessory ratio (cumulative) or advantageous section ratio (cumulative) display (4800ms)
↓
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) display (4800ms)
↓
(3) Character ratio (6000 games) display (4800ms)
↓
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) display (4800ms)
↓
(5) Character ratio (cumulative) display (4800ms)
↓
(6) Display of status ratio (cumulative) of accessories (4800ms)
↓
(1) Indication-included accessory ratio (cumulative) or advantageous section ratio (cumulative) display (4800ms)
↓
:
Will be.
As with the test pattern, each of the ratios (1) to (6) is displayed until the number of times the carry flag becomes "0" becomes "16" (300 ms x 16 times = 4800 ms). ..

Here, as described above, when the identification segment and the ratio segment are blinking and displayed, the lighting of “300” ms and the extinguishing of “300” ms are repeated (1 cycle “600” ms).
Then, when the lighting or extinguishing time is T1 and the display time of the test pattern or ratio is T2,
T2 = T1 × 2 × n (n is a natural number)
When set to, the switching timing between lighting and extinguishing can be matched with the switching timing of the test pattern display or the ratio display, and a good-looking display can be performed. It is possible not to misunderstand that it may be out of order.
In the above, when "T1" is set to "300" ms, "T2" is a multiple of "600" ms, but in order to set each ratio display time to "5000 ms ± 10%", "T2" May be set to "4800" ms.

For example, when the test pattern is blinked and then the advantageous section ratio is blinked,
Test pattern (lights up for 300ms. Cumulative 300ms.)
↓
Test pattern (lights off for 300 ms. Cumulative 600 ms.)
↓
:
↓
Test pattern (lights up for 300ms. Cumulative total of 4500ms.)
↓
Test pattern (lights off for 300 ms. Cumulative 4800 ms. Test pattern display ends.)
↓
Advantageous section ratio (lights up for 300 ms)
↓
Advantageous section ratio (lights off for 300 ms)
↓
:
Will be.

In this way, when displaying the lighting of some information, the lighting state can be maintained for "300" ms. In other words, it is possible to prevent the information from being turned off before "300" ms elapses after the lighting display of some information is started. Furthermore, it is possible to eliminate the fact that the information disappears immediately after the lighting display of some information is started (misleading that the information may be out of order).

The explanation is returned to the block diagram of FIG.
Since the sub-control board 80 is the same as the sub-control board 80 of the first embodiment (FIG. 1), the description thereof will be omitted. However, the RWM83, ROM84, and CPU85 of the sub-control board 80 may be referred to as sub-control RWM83, sub-control ROM84, and sub-control CPU85, respectively.
The same applies to the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 that are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 as in the first embodiment.
The connection terminal board (also referred to as “game ball rental device connection terminal board”) 130 has a role as a relay board for bidirectional communication between the game machine 10 and the rental unit 200.

The rental unit 200 corresponds to the management device 200 in the first embodiment (FIG. 1). Similar to the first embodiment, the lending switch 202, the return switch 203, and the like are provided.
Further, the rentable game medium number display unit 204 corresponds to the frequency display unit 204 in the first embodiment, and displays the maximum value of the number of game media that can be rented from the rental unit 200 to the game machine 10. For example, it is composed of a 3-digit LED.

Furthermore, the rentable game medium number storage means 206 stores the maximum value of the number of game media that can be rented from the rent unit 200 to the game machine 10, and is provided inside the rent unit 200, for example. It is composed of RWM. The number of rentable game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is displayed on the rentable game medium number display unit 204.

In a situation where the number of rentable game media "400" is stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206, the rent switch 202 is operated and the number of game media "50" is lent by one operation of the rent switch 202. In the case of the specification of renting out from the unit 200 to the game machine 10, "50" is added to the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a after the rental notification is transmitted. On the other hand, the number of rentable game media of the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is updated from "400" to "350".

When the return switch 203 is operated, the number of game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the rental unit 200 is stored in the game medium number storage medium (magnetic card, IC card, IC coin, etc.). It is stored, and the game medium number storage medium is discharged from the rental unit 200.
In addition, the number of game media exceeding "0" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100, and the number of game media is stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the rental unit 200. Under the situation where it is not stored, the game medium number storage medium is not ejected even if the return switch 203 is operated. In other words, even when the number of game media is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100, the number of game media is stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the rental unit 200. If not, the game medium number storage medium is not ejected even if the return switch 203 is operated.

Therefore, in the above case, by operating the counting switch 47, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is transmitted to the lending unit 200, and the number of game media is transmitted to the lending available game medium number storage means 206. Remember. After that, when the return switch 203 is operated, the number of game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is stored in the game medium number storage medium and discharged from the rental unit 200. When the number of game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is stored in the game medium number storage medium, the number of rentable game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is updated to "0". Will be done.

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a telegram used for communication between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200.
As shown in FIG. 30, the types of telegrams are as shown in FIG.
1. 1. Game machine information notification 2. Counting notification 3. Lending notice 4. A loan receipt result response is provided.
Among these telegrams, the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, and the loan receipt result response are the telegrams transmitted from the gaming machine 10 to the lending unit 200.
On the other hand, the lending notice is a telegram transmitted from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10.

In addition, each telegram is composed of the following five data.
(1) Telegram length (2) Command (3) Serial number, counting serial number, or lending serial number (4) Data section (5) Checksum The data group consisting of the above five is called "telegram" and is transmitted by one transmission. Will be done. That is, the divided transmission is not performed.

(1) Telegram length "Telegram length" indicates the length of the data length of the data consisting of the telegram length, command, serial number (serial number, counting serial number, or loan serial number), data part, and checksum. It is composed of 1-byte data. For example, if the message length is 1 byte, the command is 1 byte, the serial number is 1 byte, the data part is 14 bytes, and the checksum is 1 byte, the message is 18 bytes and the message length is 18 bytes of data (12h). It becomes.

(2) Command The "command" is data for notifying the type of the telegram among the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, the lending notification, and the lending receipt result response, and is composed of 1-byte data. NS.
For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the game machine information notification command is set to "01h", the counting notification command is set to "02h", the lending notification command is set to "13h", and the lending receipt result response command is set to "03h". Has been done.
The receiving side of the telegram can identify the type of the telegram by determining the value of the command.

(3) Serial number The "serial number" is data indicating a number included in a gaming machine information notification, a counting notification, a loan notification, and a loan receipt result response. The serial number included in the gaming machine information notification is "serial number", the serial number included in the counting notification is "counting serial number", the serial number included in the loan notification is "rental serial number", and the serial number included in the loan receipt result response is "rental serial number". It is called. These various serial numbers are numerical values in the range of "0" to "FFh" and are composed of 1-byte data.
The serial number is controlled so as to notify "00h" when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.
In addition, after the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) each time a notification is made.
The next value whose serial number is "FFh" is updated to "01h" (+1 is repeated twice) (it does not become "0").

(4) Data unit The "data unit" corresponds to the data corresponding to the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, the lending notification, and the lending receipt result response. The details of the data part of each telegram will be described later.
(5) Checksum The “checksum” is a value indicating the lower 1 byte of the total by adding the data consisting of the telegram length, the command, the serial number, the data part, and the checksum. Using this checksum, the receiving side can grasp data corruption during communication, for example, the game machine 10 or the lending unit 200 counts the number of telegrams whose checksums do not match, and communicates. You can check the status of problems in. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the number of telegrams whose checksums do not match is displayed in the image display device 23 in a predetermined situation (in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed). It may be possible to display by such as.

Next, each data unit of the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, the lending notification, and the lending receipt result response will be described.
1. 1. Data unit of game machine information notification As shown in FIG. 30, the data unit of game machine information notification is composed of a game machine type, a game machine information type, and a game machine information.
a) Game machine type The "game machine type" is information for identifying the type and the like of the game machine 10. This information is data for notifying, for example, a management medium, a group classification, a gaming machine type, and the like.

b) Game machine information type The "game machine information type" is whether the game machine information of the game machine information notification to be notified this time is game machine performance information, game machine installation information, or hall control / fraud monitoring information. Information for identifying. "00h" is notified when the gaming machine performance information is notified, "01h" is notified when the gaming machine installation information is notified, and "02h" is notified when the hall control / fraud monitoring information is notified.

c) Game machine information "Game machine information" is composed of game machine performance information, game machine installation information, and hall control / fraud monitoring information. As the gaming machine information, any one of the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted.
Here, as a general rule, the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is transmitted every "300" ms (every time the gaming machine information notification is transmitted).
Further, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted every "60" seconds.
Furthermore, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted every "180" seconds in principle.
In the above, "in principle" means that when the transmission timings of a plurality of gaming machine information overlap, the gaming machine information having the higher priority is transmitted. In other words, when the transmission timings of the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hall computer / fraud monitoring information overlap, one of them is transmitted according to the priority. As shown in FIG. 30, the gaming machine installation information transmitted every "60" seconds has the first priority, and the gaming machine performance information transmitted every "180" seconds has the second priority.

Further, the “300” ms, which is the transmission cycle of the hall control / fraud monitoring information, may be within the range of “300” to “310” ms.
Similarly, the “60” seconds, which is the transmission cycle of the gaming machine installation information, may be within the range of “60” to “62” seconds.
Similarly, the “180” seconds, which is the transmission cycle of the gaming machine performance information, may be within the range of “180” to “186” seconds.
However, the range of the transmission cycle described above does not take a random value every time, but transmits with a predetermined value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a specific configuration of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control / fraud monitoring information, which are gaming machine information of the gaming machine information notification.
(A) Gaming machine performance information Gaming machine performance information is composed of the following information such as the total number of inputs.
a) Total number of inputs The "total number of inputs" is the cumulative number of game media input since the power was turned on. When the power is turned off after the power is turned off, "0" may be output as the total number of turns. For example, in a cumulative total of "1000" games, if the cumulative number of input of the game medium is "2000", the total number of inputs is "2000", and "2000" can be output as the total number of inputs. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of turns. If the replay is won by the combination lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of bets for the next game of that game is not included in the total number of inputs.

b) Total number of grants The "total number of grants" is the cumulative number of game media granted since the power was turned on. When the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of grants. For example, in a cumulative total of "1000" games, if the cumulative number of game media granted is "2000", the total number of grants will be "2000", and "2000" may be output as the total number of grants. .. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of grants.
If the game medium of the number of bets in the game is automatically bet based on the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay, the automatically bet game medium is not included in the "number of grants". ..

c) MY (difference)
"MY" is also referred to as "difference number" or "difference number".
The “MY” is information on the maximum difference number that can be calculated from the number of times the game medium is given and the number of times the game medium is turned on after the power is turned on. When the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as MY. Specifically, based on the time when the number of game media when the result of the game is obtained is the smallest, the number of increase in the number of game media from the standard (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of inputs from the total number of grants). A certain maximum difference is referred to as "MY". For example, in the cumulative total of "1000" games, the "100" game has the smallest difference in the number of game media, the number of game media at that time is "-200", and the "800" game from that point. When the game has the largest difference in the number of game media and the number of game media at that time is "+800", the MY becomes "+1000" and "1000" can be output as the MY. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as MY.

d) Total number of bonuses granted The "total number of bonuses granted" is given by the operation of the bonuses (single bonus (SB), regular bonus (RB), and challenge bonus (CB)) after the power is turned on. It is the total number (cumulative number) of the game media played. When the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of accessories. For example, in a cumulative total of "1000" games, if the total number of game media obtained by operating the accessory is "100", the total number of bonuses granted is "100", and the total number of bonuses granted is "100". "100" can be output as. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of accessories.

e) Total number of continuous bonuses granted The "total number of continuous bonuses granted" is given by the operation of continuous bonuses (first-class special bonuses, also called regular bonus (RB)) after the power is turned on. It is the total number (cumulative number) of the game media played. When the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of continuous accessories. For example, in a cumulative total of "1000" games, if the total number of game media obtained by operating the continuous bonus is "100", the total number of continuous bonuses granted is "100", and the continuous bonus is given. "100" can be output as the total number of grants. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of continuous accessories.
In addition, the number of game media granted by the operation of the first-class special accessory continuous operation device (also referred to as "type 1 BB") by the first-class special accessory continuous operation device (also referred to as "type 1 BB") is also used as the total number of continuous bonuses granted. Accumulate.

f) Character ratio As described above, it is a value of the character ratio (cumulative) displayed by the character ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500 times), "FFh" is output as the accessory ratio (cumulative).
g) Continuous accessory ratio As described above, this is the value of the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) displayed by the combination ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500 times), "FFh" is output as the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative).

h) Advantageous section ratio As described above, it is the value of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) displayed by the combination ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 175,000 times), "FFh" is output as an advantageous section ratio. Further, even a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous section is configured to output "FFh".
i) Instructed accessory ratio As described above, this is the value of the indicated accessory ratio (cumulative) displayed by the combination monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 175,000 times), "FFh" is output as the instruction-included accessory ratio. Further, even a gaming machine that does not have an accessory or an instruction function is configured to output "FFh".

j) Characteristic state ratio As described above, this is the value of the character / value state ratio (cumulative) displayed by the role ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 175,000 times), "FFh" is output as the status ratio of the accessory and the like. Further, even a gaming machine that does not have an accessory is configured to output "FFh".
k) Number of games The “number of games” is the cumulative number of games since the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. It is cleared when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (“0” is stored).
l) Others As information other than the above, a plurality of types of information such as information used in the lending unit 200 can be mentioned, but the description thereof is omitted in the present embodiment.

(B) Game machine installation information The game machine installation information is composed of the following information such as the main control chip ID number.
a) Main control chip ID number The "main control chip ID number" is information including a chip individual number for identifying the main control chip in which the CPU 55, RWM 53, and ROM 54 provided on the main control board 50 are integrated. Therefore, even if the same model is used, the information will be different for each gaming machine 10.
b) Main control chip maker code The "main control chip maker code" is information indicating the gaming machine maker stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

c) Main control chip product code The "main control chip product code" is information indicating the model name of the gaming machine 10 stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.
The above-mentioned main control chip ID number, main control chip maker code, and main control chip product code are transferred from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100 in the power-on process when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is configured to be transmitted. The RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is configured to store the main control chip ID number, the main control chip maker code, and the main control chip product code, respectively.

d) Game medium number control chip ID number The "game medium number control chip ID number" identifies the game medium number control chip in which the CPU 105, RWM 103, and ROM 104 provided on the game medium number control board 100 are integrated. This is information including the individual chip numbers for the game, and even if the same model is used, the information will be different for each game machine 10.
In the case of a gaming machine on which the gaming medium number control board 100 is not mounted, "000000000000000000000000h" can be output to the rental unit 200 as the gaming medium number control chip ID number.

e) Game medium number control chip maker code The “game medium number control chip maker code” is information indicating the game machine maker stored in the built-in memory (ROM54) of the game medium number control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine on which the gaming medium number control board 100 is not mounted, "000000h" can be output to the rental unit 200 as the gaming medium number control chip maker code.
f) Game medium number control chip product code The “game medium number control chip product code” is information indicating the model name of the game machine 10 stored in the built-in memory (ROM 54) of the main control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine on which the gaming medium number control board 100 is not mounted, "0000000000000000h" can be output to the rental unit as the game medium number control chip product code.

(C) Hallcon / fraud monitoring information Hallcon / fraud monitoring information is composed of the following information such as the number of game media.
a) Number of game media The "number of game media" is information indicating the current number of game media (total number) stored in the game medium number control board 100, and is reduced by the input (bet) of the game media and is small. It is added by giving a game medium based on the winning of the role. The current number of game media is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and is displayed on the game medium number display unit 121. When, for example, "2000" is stored as the number of game media, "0007D0h" can be output to the rental unit 200 as the number of game media. The upper limit of the number of game media that can be stored in the game medium number control board 100 is "16383 (D)".
By transmitting the current number of game media to the rental unit 200 (every "300" ms), the number of game media can be managed on the rental unit 200 side as well. As a result, security can be further strengthened.

b) Number of inputs The “number of inputs” is information indicating the number of game media that have been input (bet). For example, when the number of game media "3" is inserted (bet), "03h" can be output to the rental unit 200. Further, when the input number "3" is returned to the game medium number control board 100 by operating the settlement switch 46 before starting the game from the situation where "3" is input (before the start switch 41 is operated). , "FDh" corresponding to "-3" can be output to the rental unit 200. In other words, the information of "-3" (FDh) to +3 (03h) can be output to the rental unit 200.

c) Number of grants The "number of grants" is information indicating the number of game media (dividends) granted according to the mode of the symbol combination stopped (winning) on the effective line after all reels 31 have stopped. .. For example, when the number of game media "8" is given, the information of "08h" can be output, and when "15" is given, "0Fh" can be output to the rental unit 200.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can detect an abnormality in the number of gaming media on the lending unit 200 side by transmitting the above-mentioned "number of gaming media", "number of inputs", and "number of grants" to the lending unit 200. It has become.

d) Main control state 1
The "main control state 1" is information indicating a state related to the game state. Specifically, in the 1-byte data, which gaming state is assigned to each bit. For example, when the D0 bit is "1", it indicates that it is in the RB state, and when the D1 bit is "1", it indicates that it is in the BB state. Furthermore, when the D2 bit is "1", for example, it indicates that it is in the BB state. Indicates an AT state. Then, the gaming machine 10 can output such information to the rental unit 200.

The D3 to D6 bits correspond to the gaming machine status signals 1 to 4. The game machine status signals 1 to 4 can be used or not used depending on the type of the game machine 10. For example, every time the number of gaming media assigned by the AT reaches "100", the gaming machine status signal 1 can be output. The D7 bit is unused and is configured so that "0" can be output regardless of the type of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, for example, when notifying that the AT state is in effect, "00000100B" can be output to the rental unit 200.

e) Main control state 2
The "main control state 2" is information indicating a state related to the game state, as in the main control state 1. The D0 bits to D2 bits correspond to the gaming machine status signals 5 to 7. The game status signals 5 to 7 can be used or not used depending on the type of the game machine 10. For example, when the state shifts to a specific RT state (re-game probability fluctuation (high probability) state), the game state signal 5 may be output. The D3 to D7 bits are unused and are configured so that "0" can be output regardless of the type of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, for example, when shifting to a specific RT state, "00000001B" can be output to the rental unit 200.

f) Game machine error state The "game machine error state" is information including an error code or the like indicating an error occurring in the game machine 10.
Specifically, the error code is indicated by bits D0 to D5. Whether the D6 bit is an error in the game medium number control board 100 (in this case, the D6 bit is "0") or an error in the main control board 50 (in this case, the D6 bit is "1"). Is shown. The lending unit 200 only notifies the error with the D7 bit (in this case, the D7 bit is "0"), or the lending unit 200 notifies the error and the hall computer 300 is notified through the lending unit 200. Also indicates whether the error code is notified (in this case, the D7 bit is "1").

For example, it is assumed that the gaming machine 10 can detect a random number abnormality error and a radio wave abnormality error as the types of errors. At this time, as the error code, the random number abnormality error is set to "00001B" and the radio wave abnormality error is set to "000010B", and the information including this error code can be output. Specifically, the random number abnormality error is an error of the main control board 50, and when only the error notification is performed by the lending unit 200, "01000001B" can be output to the lending unit 200. Further, the radio wave abnormality error is an error of the game medium number control board 100, and when the rental unit 200 notifies the error and further notifies the hall computer 300 of the error code, "10000010B" is used as the rental unit 200. It is possible to output to. If no error has occurred or if the gaming machine does not have an error code, "0000000000B" can be output to the rental unit 200.

g) Pachinko machine fraud 1 (main control)
“Game machine fraud 1 (main control)” is information regarding detection of fraud related to the main control board 50 and a state related to the main control board 50. The signal of the gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) is treated as a signal for the hall computer 300. In other words, each signal of the gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the gaming machine 10 is output to the hall computer 300 through the lending unit 200.

Each signal constituting the game machine fraud 1 (main control) is as follows.
First, a signal during setting change is assigned to the D0 bit. When the D0 bit is "1", it indicates that the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) and that the setting has been changed. The D0 bit of the setting changing signal is "1" from the setting change to the end of one game after the setting change (for example, when all reels 31 are stopped and the game medium addition process is completed). The D0 bit is set to "0" in situations other than the time when the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting is changed.
A setting confirmation signal is assigned to the D1 bit. When the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the D1 bit is set to "1", and when the setting is not being confirmed, the D1 bit is set to "0".

A fraud detection signal 1 is assigned to the D2 bit, a fraud detection signal 2 is assigned to the D3 bit, and a fraud detection signal 3 is assigned to the D4 bit. For example, in the game machine 10 in which the random number abnormality is invalid, when the detection of the random number abnormality is assigned to the fraud detection signal 1, the D2 bit becomes "1" when the random number abnormality is detected, and the random number abnormality is detected. If not, the D2 bit becomes "0".
A security signal is assigned to the D5 bit. Specifically, the D5 bit becomes "1" under any of the following conditions: when the fraud detection signal is being output, when the setting changing signal is being output, or when the setting confirmation signal is being output. In other situations, the D5 bit is "0".
The D6 and D7 bits are unused and will be any "0".

h) Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or number of gaming media)
"Game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control)" refers to the detection of fraud related to the main control board 50 or the game medium number control board 100 and the state related to the main control board 50 or the game medium number control board 100. This is the information to be shown. The signal of the game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control) is treated as a signal for the hall computer 300. In other words, each signal of the game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control) output from the game machine 10 is output to the hall computer 300 through the lending unit 200.

Each signal constituting the game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control) is as follows.
A setting door open signal is assigned to the D0 bit. The "setting door open signal" is a signal indicating whether or not the setting key switch cover covering the setting key switch 12 for changing the setting is open. When the setting key switch cover is open, the D0 bit becomes "1", and when the setting key switch cover is closed, the D0 bit becomes "0". In a gaming machine that does not have a setting key switch cover or a gaming machine that does not have a function of detecting the opening of the setting key switch cover, the D0 bit is set to "0".

A door open signal is assigned to the D1 bit. The "door open signal" is information indicating whether or not the door (also referred to as "front door" or "front door") of the gaming machine 10 is open. When the door of the gaming machine 10 is open, the D1 bit becomes "1", and when the door of the gaming machine 10 is closed, the D1 bit becomes "0".
The D2 bit is unused and is "0".
A game medium number clear detection is assigned to the D3 bit. The “game medium number clear detection” is a detection that the total game medium number clear switch 112 provided on the game medium number control board 100 is operated (the total number of game media is cleared).
When the operation of the total number of game media clear switch 112 is detected, the D3 bit becomes "1", and when the operation of the total number of game media clear switch 112 is not detected, the D3 bit becomes "0". In the case of a gaming machine that does not have the total number of gaming media clear switch 112, the D3 bit is "0".
The D4 to D7 bits are unused, and these bits are "0".

i) Pachinko machine fraud 3 (main control or number of gaming media)
The “game machine fraud 3” is provided as a spare and indicates information on the detection of fraud related to the main control board 50 or the game medium number control board 100 and the state information related to the main control board 50 or the game medium number control board 100. ..
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or game medium number control) is unused, and the D0 to D7 bits are "0".
Further, although not shown in FIG. 31, other information is provided as the hall control / fraud monitoring information, but the description is omitted in the present embodiment.

The description returns to FIG.
2. Data unit of counting notification The data unit of counting notification is composed of the number of counting game media and the number of cumulative counting game media.
a) Number of counting game media The “number of counting game media” is the number of gaming media transmitted (returned) from the game machine 10 to the rental unit 200 based on the operation of the counting switch 47. The number of counting game media ranges from "0x00h" to "0x32h", and a maximum of "50 (D)" can be transmitted to the lending unit 200 in one counting notification. When the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 is "50" or more, the data of "0x32h" indicating "50" is transmitted, but the game medium number control board 100 stores the data. When the number of game media being played is less than "50", data corresponding to the current number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 is transmitted. For example, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 is "30 (D)", the data of "0x1Eh" is transmitted.

The above-mentioned example of the number of counting game media is an example in which "50" is notified when the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted only once (hereinafter, may be referred to as "short press operation"). However, when the short press operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, "1" is notified as the number of counting game media, and when the long pressing operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, "50" is notified as the number of counting game media. You may.
Here, "accepting the short press operation of the counting switch 47" means, for example, the period during which the game medium number control board 100 has a value indicating that the level data relating to the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 is ON (in interrupt processing). The period during which the operation reception of the counting switch 47 is a value indicating ON) may be less than a predetermined period (for example, less than "1" seconds). That is, when the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted in a time less than the predetermined period, it is determined that the short pressing operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, and the number of counting game media is set to "1".

If the number of game media "50" is uniformly counted when the counting switch 47 is operated once, it becomes impossible for the player to take out less than the number of game media "50", for example, the number of game media "1". .. Therefore, if the minimum unit number of game media "1" can be taken out by, for example, a short press operation of the counting switch 47, it matches the purpose of the counting switch 47 that "it has the performance of freely taking out the game medium". It becomes a thing.

On the other hand, "accepting the long press operation of the counting switch 47" means, for example, the period during which the game medium number control board 100 has a value indicating that the level data relating to the acceptance of the operation of the counting switch 47 is ON (counting by interrupt processing). There is a case where the operation reception of the switch 47 is a value indicating ON) is a predetermined period or more (for example, “1” second or more). That is, when the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted for a time equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the number of counting game media is set to "50", assuming that the long press operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted.

If the counting switch 47 is still pressed and held at the timing of transmitting the counting notification next time after the counting game medium number "50" is transmitted to the lending unit 200 in the counting notification, the counting game media number is counted as the counting notification. "50" is transmitted to the lending unit 200. That is, after the long press determination is made once, the number of counting game media "50" is lent out in the counting notification until the counting switch 47 is no longer operated (until the level data related to the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 becomes a value indicating off). Continue to send to 200. In this case, counting is not performed until it is determined that the counting switch 47 is being pressed for a long time (for example, for "1" seconds).

b) Number of cumulative counting game media The "cumulative number of counting gaming media" is the cumulative value of the number of cumulative gaming media counted since the power of the gaming machine 10 was turned on. The cumulative number of counting game media is in the range of "0x0000h" to "0xFFFFh", and the number of counting game media is added each time counting is performed. When the total number of counting game media exceeds "0xFFFFh", the value next to "0xFFFFh" is set to "0x0000h". Further, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the total number of counting gaming media is cleared (set to "0").

3. 3. The data unit of the lending notification The "number of lending game media", which is the data unit of the lending notification, is the number of gaming media related to lending transmitted from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10 by operating the lending switch 202 of the lending unit 200. Is. The number of rented gaming media ranges from "0x00h" to "0x32h", and a maximum of "50 (D)" can be transmitted to the gaming machine 10 with one renting notification. When the number of rentable gaming media stored on the lending unit 200 side is "50" or more, "0x32h" data indicating "50" is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, when the number of rentable game media stored in the lending unit 200 side is less than "50", the data corresponding to the current number of rentable game media stored in the lending unit 200 side is transmitted. Will be done. For example, when the number of rentable game media is "20", the data of "0x14h" indicating "20" is transmitted.

4. The data unit of the loan receipt result response The "rental game medium number receipt result", which is the data unit of the loan receipt result response, is based on the reception of the data of the number of loan game media transmitted from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10. , Data transmitted from the gaming machine 10 to the rental unit 200. When the data received from the lending unit 200 is normal, it is "0x00h", and when it is abnormal, it is "0x01h".
For example, if it becomes abnormal,
a) If the lending serial numbers notified by the lending unit 200 are not consecutive
b) When the gaming machine 10 side cannot be rented due to an abnormality in the RWM 103 of the gaming medium number control board 100, etc.
c) The number of game media The sum of the total number of game media stored in the control board 100 and the number of rented game media exceeds the upper limit of the number of game media stored in the game media control board 100. Be done.
Further, when the value is other than "0x00h" and "0x01h" due to other factors, the lending unit 200 is determined to be abnormal.

Subsequently, the communication between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a time chart showing a basic communication sequence between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200.
The gaming machine 10 transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit 200 every "300" ms from the time when the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed. In the example of FIG. 32, the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n” is transmitted, and after the lapse of “300” ms, the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n + 1” is transmitted.
In the gaming machine information of the gaming machine information notification, as shown in FIG. 30, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted every "180" seconds, and the gaming machine installation information is transmitted every "60" seconds. -Fraud monitoring information is transmitted every "300" ms, which will be described later.

Further, the gaming machine 10 transmits a counting notification to the lending unit 200 after "100" ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification.
Further, the lending unit 200 transmits the lending notice to the gaming machine 10 within "170" ms after receiving the counting notification. Then, after receiving the lending notification, the gaming machine 10 transmits a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200 within "10" ms.
Since the gaming machine 10 transmits the next gaming machine information notification "300" ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, from the transmission of the loan receipt result response to the transmission of the next gaming machine information notification. The interval is "20" ms or more.

FIG. 33 is a time chart illustrating Example 1 of the activation sequence of the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200, and shows a case where the gaming machine 10 is activated first.
When both the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are turned off (synonymous with "power off"; the same applies hereinafter), the VL signal and the PSI signal between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are turned off. ing.
The VL signal is a signal that is turned on when the game machine 10 becomes playable (a game medium can be bet), and is a signal that is turned off until the rental unit 200 is activated.
The PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200, and is a signal that is off until the rental unit 200 is activated.

After the power is turned on, when the start-up of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the start-up of the rental unit 200 has not been completed yet.
Under this circumstance, the gaming machine 10 transmits the first telegram, that is, the gaming machine information notification, to the lending unit 200 according to the telegram notification program, and further, as described above, "100" ms from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification. A count notification will be sent later. However, when the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification are transmitted, the lending unit 200 cannot receive the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification because the activation of the lending unit 200 has not been completed yet. In the figure, the “?” Mark indicates that the gaming machine 10 has transmitted the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification, but the lending unit 200 cannot receive these notifications.
Further, since the lending unit 200 has not been activated yet and the counting notification has not been received, the lending unit 200 does not send the lending notification to the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 does not transmit the loan receipt result response.

After the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed, "0x00h" is transmitted as the serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification to be transmitted first. Further, since the serial number and the counting serial number are updated regardless of whether or not the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are connected, the next transmission timing (the first game transmitted after the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed). At the timing of transmission after "300" ms of the machine information notification), "0x01h" is transmitted as the serial number and the counting serial number.

After that, when the activation of the rental unit 200 is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal are turned on, and the operation of the bet switch 40 and the operation of the counting switch 47 of the gaming machine 10 become effective. Further, the lending unit 200 can receive the information transmitted from the gaming machine 10. After the lending unit 200 is activated, the lending unit 200 can transmit the lending notification to the gaming machine 10 based on the reception of the counting notification. In the example of FIG. 33, the gaming machine 10 transmits the counting notification of the counting serial number “m” to the lending unit 200, and when the lending unit 200 receives the notification, the lending notification of the lending serial number “k” is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. An example is shown.
Further, the gaming machine 10 can transmit a loan receipt result response to the lending unit 200 based on the received lending notification. In the example of FIG. 33, the gaming machine 10 shows an example in which the lending receipt result response of the lending serial number “k” is transmitted to the lending unit 200 based on the receipt of the lending notification of the lending serial number “k”.

As described above, since the gaming machine 10 transmits the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification regardless of whether or not the lending unit 200 is activated, the lending unit 200 has the lending unit 200 after the activation of the lending unit 200 is completed. It is managed from the serial number of the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the gaming machine 10 and the counting serial number of the counting notification. With this configuration, the gaming machine 10 can transmit a telegram without determining the status of the rental unit 200, so that the program capacity for determining the status of the rental unit 200 can be reduced.

FIG. 34 is a time chart illustrating Example 2 of the activation sequence of the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200, and shows a case where the rental unit 200 is activated first.
If only the power of the rental unit 200 is turned on while the power of the gaming machine 10 is off, only the rental unit 200 starts to start. The VL signal and the PSI signal are off while the rental unit 200 is activated.
Then, when the activation of the lending unit 200 is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the lending unit 200 are turned on.

FIG. 34 shows an example in which the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on after the VL signal and the PSI signal of the rental unit 200 are turned on.
When the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the VL signals and the PSI signals of both the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are turned on, and the operation of the bet switch 40 and the operation of the counting switch 47 of the gaming machine 10 become effective.

Then, as in the example of FIG. 33, the gaming machine 10 transmits the first telegram, that is, the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit 200 according to the telegram notification program, and further, “100” from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification. A count notification is sent after ms. Since the activation of the lending unit 200 is completed at this point, the lending unit 200 can receive the first gaming machine information notification and the counting notification.
When the lending unit 200 receives the counting notification, it transmits the lending notification to the gaming machine 10 within "170" ms. Further, when the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, the gaming machine 10 transmits a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200 within "10" ms.
As described above, when the activation of the rental unit 200 is already completed when the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the rental unit 200 is the first telegram (game with the serial number "0") transmitted from the gaming machine 10. It can be received from the machine information notification).

FIG. 35 is a time chart illustrating a basic sequence of gaming machine information notification.
In FIG. 35, after the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the first gaming machine information notification is referred to as "A0", and the subsequent gaming machine information notifications are referred to as "A1", "A2", ....
Similarly, the count notification is referred to as "B0", "B1", "B2", ..., The loan notification is referred to as "C0", "C1", "C2", ... It is referred to as "D0", "D1", "D2", ...
As shown in FIG. 32, the gaming machine 10 transmits a gaming machine information notification to the lending unit 200 every "300" ms.
Here, as shown in FIG.
(1) Pachinko machine performance information: Every 180 seconds (second priority)
(2) Pachinko machine installation information: Every 60 seconds (first priority)
(3) Hall computer / fraud monitoring information: A game machine information notification including any game machine information is transmitted every 300 ms.

In principle, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted every "300" ms, but it overlaps with the transmission cycle of the gaming machine installation information transmitted every "60" seconds, and the gaming machine performance is transmitted every "180" seconds. If it does not overlap with the information transmission cycle, the gaming machine installation information is preferentially transmitted at the transmission timing, and the hall controller is transmitted at the next transmission timing (after "300" ms) after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted. -Send fraud monitoring information.
In FIG. 35, the “200”th transmission of the gaming machine information notification (“A199” in the figure) after the activation of the gaming machine 10 is “60” seconds after the first transmission of the gaming machine information notification. (300 ms x 200 = 60,000 ms).
Therefore, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A199", the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information is transmitted with priority over the hall computer / fraud monitoring information. Then, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A200""300" ms after the transmission, the gaming machine information notification including the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

Further, if it overlaps with the transmission cycle of the gaming machine installation information having a cycle of "60" seconds and overlaps with the transmission cycle of the gaming machine performance information having a cycle of "180" seconds, the gaming machine installation information is given as the first priority. The gaming machine performance information is transmitted as the second priority in the next transmission cycle ("300" ms after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information). Further, in the next transmission cycle ("300" ms after the transmission of the gaming machine performance information), the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is transmitted.
In FIG. 35, the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of “A599” is “60” seconds and “180” seconds after the first transmission of the gaming machine information notification (300 ms × 600 = 180000 ms). .. It should be noted that the elapse of "180" seconds always corresponds to the elapse of "60" seconds.

Therefore, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A599", the gaming machine installation information is transmitted as the first priority. Further, at the transmission timing of the game machine information notification of "A600" after "300" ms has elapsed from that time, the game machine performance information is transmitted as the second priority. Further, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A601" after "300" ms has elapsed from that time, the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

When transmitting the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information (hall control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information) is acquired (read from RWM, ROM, etc.), stored in the transmission register, and stored. Send from the specified output port.
Therefore, the latest information immediately before transmission is transmitted for all of the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information.
Among the game machine information notifications, the game machine installation information is the main control chip ID number and the like, so it is not information that changes with the passage of time (progress of the game) but fixed information.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is information including the number of game media, the number of inputs, the number of grants, and the like, and thus is information that changes depending on the progress of the game (elapsed time).

When the transmission cycles of the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine performance information, and the hall control / fraud monitoring information all overlap, they are transmitted in the order of priority of the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine performance information, and the hall control / fraud monitoring information. Therefore, from the time when the transmission cycle of the gaming machine information notification (“300” ms) arrives, the transmission of the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is delayed at the longest by “600” ms.

In this case, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired at the time of transmission of the gaming machine installation information, and after "600" ms has elapsed from the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information (after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information and the game). If the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted (after the machine performance information is transmitted), the hall control / fraud monitoring information "600" ms ago will be transmitted.
Therefore, when transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired and stored in the transmission register immediately before the actual transmission.

The above is the same when the transmission cycles of the gaming machine installation information and the hall computer / fraud monitoring information overlap. In this case, the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is transmitted after "300" ms from the time when the transmission cycle ("300" ms) of the gaming machine information notification has arrived.
Here, if the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired at the time of transmission of the game machine installation information and the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted after "300" ms has elapsed from the transmission timing of the game machine installation information, " The pachinko / fraud monitoring information 300 "ms ago will be transmitted.
Therefore, when transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired and stored in the transmission register immediately before the actual transmission.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, the gaming machine performance information includes the total number of inputs, the total number of grants, the MY, and the like, and therefore changes depending on the progress of the game (elapsed time).
When the transmission cycles of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information overlap, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted with priority over the gaming machine performance information, so that the transmission cycle of the gaming machine information notification ("300"). The gaming machine performance information is transmitted after "300" ms have elapsed from the time when "ms) has arrived.
In this case, if the gaming machine performance information is acquired at the time of transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted after "300" ms has elapsed from the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, "300" ms before. The performance information of the pachinko / pachislot machine will be transmitted.
Therefore, when the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the gaming machine performance information is acquired immediately before the actual transmission and stored in the transmission register.
In other words, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification every "300" ms, the gaming machine information (hall controller / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance) of the gaming machine information notification transmitted by this interrupt processing Only one of the information) is stored in the transmission register.

FIG. 36 is a time chart illustrating a counting notification sequence.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, such as when the player finishes the game, a process of transmitting (returning or returning) the game medium on the game machine 10 side to the lending unit 200 is executed.
The counting process does not actually transmit or transfer the game medium data on the game machine 10 side to the lending unit 200, but the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game machine 10. The subtraction process is executed, and the addition process of the number of game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 is executed.
In the example of FIG. 36, the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 (game medium number storage means 103a) is "200" as a situation before accepting the operation of the counting switch 47. It is assumed that the number of rentable game media stored in the renting unit 200 is "20".

The first game machine information after detecting the operation (ON) of the counting switch 47 in a situation where the game machine 10 and the rental unit 200 have been started and the game machine 10 and the rental unit 200 can communicate with each other. At the timing of transmitting the notification to the rental unit 200, the serial number of the gaming machine information notification is assumed to be "n". Further, since the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 at this point is "200", the number of game media "200" is transmitted to the rental unit 200.
Further, the gaming machine 10 updates the counting notification to the lending unit 200. It is assumed that the counting serial number of the counting notification at this time is "m". Further, the number of counting game media in the counting notification at this time is "50". In this example, when the operation of the counting switch 47 is detected, the number of counting game media "50" is transmitted by transmitting the counting notification once.

Further, assuming that the processing related to the counting is the processing related to the counting for the first time after the start of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the total number of counting gaming media "50" is transmitted as a counting notification. The gaming machine 10 subtracts the number of counting game media from the number of gaming media before executing the process of transmitting the counting notification. Therefore, the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 is updated from "200" to "150" before executing the process of transmitting the count notification. When the lending unit 200 receives the counting notification, the lending unit 200 adds the counting game medium to the number of lending game media stored in the lending game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 36, the number of rentable game media is updated from "20" to "70".
Subsequently, the lending unit 200 transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. The lending serial number of this lending notice shall be "k". In addition, the number of rental game media in this loan notification is "0". Here, the reason why the number of rental game media "0" is transmitted is that the rental switch 202 is not operated.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notice from the lending unit 200, the gaming machine 10 checks the consistency between the information indicated by the lending notice and the information indicated by the previous lending notice.
Then, as a result of checking the consistency between the information indicated by the lending notice and the information indicated by the previous lending notice, when it is determined that the information is normal, the gaming machine 10 sets the lending serial number to "k" and sets the lending point receipt result. A loan receipt result response that is considered to be "normal" is transmitted to the loan unit 200.

When the next serial number "n + 1" game machine information notification is transmitted, the serial number "n + 1" and the number of gaming media "150" are transmitted.
FIG. 36 shows the counting switch 47 even when the next serial number “n + 1” gaming machine information notification is transmitted after “300” ms has passed after the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n” is transmitted. This is an example in which the on state of is maintained (the counting switch 47 is held down). Therefore, as the counting notification, the counting serial number "m + 1", the counting game medium number "50", and the counting cumulative game medium number "100" are transmitted. As a result, on the rental unit 200 side, the number of game media that can be rented is updated to "120".
Further, the lending unit 200 transmits the lending serial number “k + 1” and the number of lending game media “0” to the gaming machine 10 as lending notifications. Further, when the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, it transmits the lending serial number “k + 1” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit 200 as a lending receipt result response.

In this way, in a situation where the gaming medium is stored in the gaming machine 10, the period from the detection of the on of the counting switch 47 to the detection of the off of the counting switch 47 (while the counting switch 47 is held down) is Every "300" ms, the gaming machine 10 continues to transmit the counting notification including a predetermined number of counting game media to the rental unit 200. With this configuration, it is possible to transmit a fixed amount (“50” in this example) of counting game media to the rental unit 200 every “300” ms without causing complicated operations (just press and hold). Therefore, the burden of counting operations can be reduced.
Since the counting switch 47 is connected to the game medium number control board 100, the input port 101 is checked for each interrupt process of the game medium number control board 100, and the input port 101 indicating the counting switch 47 is turned on. If the information has been input, the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted. After that, when the information indicating off is input to the input port 101 indicating the counting switch 47, the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 is terminated.

The example of FIG. 36 shows an example in which the off of the counting switch 47 is detected after the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n + 1” is transmitted and before the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n + 2” is transmitted. ..
In this case, the gaming machine 10 transmits the number of gaming media "100" when transmitting the gaming machine information notification of the serial number "n + 2".
Further, as the counting notification, the counting serial number "m + 2", the counting game medium number "0", and the counting cumulative game medium number "100" are transmitted. Furthermore, the lending unit 200 transmits the lending serial number “k + 2” and the number of lending game media “0” to the gaming machine 10 as a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming machine 10 transmits the lending serial number “k + 2” and the lending point receipt result “normal” as a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200.

The counting notification is transmitted "100" ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification. In other words, the count notification is sent every "300" ms. Therefore, even when the counting switch 47 is not operated, a counting notification in which the number of counting game media is "0" is transmitted every "300" ms.
Further, in a situation where the game medium is not stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game machine 10, even if the counting switch 47 is operated, the counting notification that the number of counting game media is "0" is "300" ms. Sent every time.

Next, the counting process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the counting process in the second embodiment.
Although not shown in FIG. 29, the RWM 103 of the game medium control board 100 includes the following storage areas.
The counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not counting is in progress.
The counting value storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) is a storage area for storing the counting value (number of counting game media) transmitted at the time of counting notification.
The count cumulative value storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL) is a storage area for storing the count cumulative value (count cumulative game medium number).
The counting serial number storage area (_NB_CAL_NUM) is a storage area for storing the counting serial number.
In the case of a gaming machine that does not include the gaming medium number control board 100, the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 may be provided with each of the above storage areas.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not it is the counting notification timing. Here, the “counting notification timing” refers to a timing that is “100” ms after the game machine information notification is transmitted. It should be noted that after the elapse of "100" ms, it may be within the range of "90" ms to "100" ms.
When it is determined that it is the counting notification timing, the process proceeds to step S702, and when it is determined that it is not the counting notification timing, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

When it is determined that the counting notification timing is reached and the process proceeds to step S702, the game medium number control board 100 clears the counting flag (to "0"). Next, the process proceeds to step S703, and it is determined whether or not to execute the counting. Here, it is determined whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, the counting switch signal is turned on and input to the input port 101 of the game medium number control board 100. Then, when the counting switch signal is turned on and input to the input port 101, information indicating that the counting switch signal is turned on and input (when the counting switch 47 is operated) is input (when operated). Is stored in a predetermined storage area in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100. The signal input to the input port 101 is stored in the RWM 103 by timer interrupt processing every 1 ms.
When it is determined in step S703 that the counting switch 47 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S704, and when it is determined that the counting switch 47 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100 is “0”. If it is determined that the number of game media is not "0", the process proceeds to step S705, and if it is determined that the number is "0", the process proceeds to step S712.
In this way, it is first determined whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated, and if the counting switch 47 is not operated, the counting process is not started, and if the counting switch 47 is operated, the game medium. It is determined whether or not the number of (total) game media stored in the number storage means 103a is "0". Then, when the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "0", the counting process is not started, and when the number of (total) game media is not "0", the counting process is started. It is configured to do.
As a result, when the situation in which the counting switch 47 is operated is compared with the situation in which the (total) number of gaming media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "0", the counting switch 47 is operated. Since the number of situations is relatively small, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the counting process by first determining whether or not the counting switch 47 is operated.

In step S705, "50" is set as the counting value (counting game medium number).
Next, the process proceeds to step S706, and an arithmetic process (a subtractive arithmetic process) for comparing the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a with the count value “50” is executed. As a result of this arithmetic processing, when it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is equal to or greater than the count value, the process proceeds to step S708, and the total number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is totaled. If it is determined that the value is less than the numerical value, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is acquired.
In the next step S708, the counted value is saved. When this process is determined to be "Yes" in step S706 (it is determined that the number of game media is equal to or greater than the count value), the count value "50" set in step S705 is stored in the count value storage area. .. On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S706 (when the number of game media is less than the count value), the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a acquired in step S707 is used as the count value. Save in the count value storage area.

In the next step S709, the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated. This process is a process of subtracting the count value stored in the count value storage area from the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. Therefore, when it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "50" or more and "50" is stored in the count value storage area, it is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. "50" is subtracted from the number of game media that have been played, and the number of game media is updated. On the other hand, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is less than "50" and the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is stored in the count value storage area, The number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated to "0".
Next, the process proceeds to step S710, and the count value stored in the count value storage area is added to the count cumulative value storage area to update the value stored in the count cumulative value storage area.
Next, the process proceeds to step S711, and since it has been decided to perform counting, the counting flag is set (“FFh” is stored).

Then, the process proceeds to step S712 to output a count notification. Specifically, "0x07h" is output as the message length, "0x02h" is output as the command, the counting serial number stored in the counting serial number storage area is output as the counting serial number, and the counting value is stored as the counting value. The count value stored in the area is output, the cumulative count value stored in the cumulative count value storage area is output as the cumulative count value, and the checksum value (1 byte) of the output various data is output.
After that, the process proceeds to step S713, and the count value stored in the count value storage area is cleared. The value stored in the cumulative count value storage area is not cleared at the timing when the count notification is output.

Next, the process proceeds to step S714, and the process of updating the counting serial number (process of setting to "+1") is executed. Since the result of performing "+1" when the counting serial number is "255 (D)" is "0", when it becomes "0", the process of updating the counting serial number again ("+1"). ”Process) is executed. In other words, when the counting serial number is "255", the counting serial number is updated to "1" by executing the process of updating the counting serial number twice. Further, when the counting serial number is a value less than "255" (for example, "10"), the result of executing the process of updating the counting serial number (the process of "+1") is not "0", so the counting serial number is updated. The process to be performed is executed only once. In the above example, the counting serial number is updated to "11".

In addition, information based on the counting flag is transmitted to the main control board 50. As a result, the main control board 50 can determine that counting is in progress. Further, for example, by transmitting information indicating that counting is being performed from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 can perform an effect corresponding to the counting.

In this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but the counting switch 47 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When it is operated, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. This configuration is because there is a high possibility that the hall clerk is counting when the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (possibly not a player). (Because of its high nature).

On the other hand, when the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a dedicated screen during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the image display device 23, or audio is output. You may. In this way, the necessary information can be provided to the hall clerk. Further, while displaying a dedicated screen in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed. The notification in this case is configured to be different from the above-mentioned effect during counting (for the player). Attention can be issued by such notification.

Further, in the present embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even during an error (a predetermined (predetermined) error or all errors).
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during the error, the counting switch 47 is operated. The effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch 47 is operated during an error, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed.
The errors include a non-recoverable error (for example, an error that requires resetting of set values (including power on / off) such as an RWM error and a random number update error) and a recoverable error (for example,). (For example, a door open error of the front door), but depending on the type of error, a situation in which counting processing is impossible and a situation in which counting processing is possible may be provided. For example, counting processing can be performed while a recoverable error has occurred, and counting processing can be performed while a recoverable error has occurred.

On the other hand, when the counting switch 47 is operated during the error, the image display device 23 may display the dedicated screen during the error or may output the sound. In this way, the necessary information can be provided to the hall clerk. Further, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed while displaying a dedicated screen during an error. The notification in this case is configured to be different from the above-mentioned effect during counting (for the player). Attention can be issued by such notification. At this time, the checkout switch 46 may be configured so that the number of bets cannot be returned.

Further, in the present embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even during the game (for example, in a situation where the reel 31 is rotating).
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during the game, the effect is executed. The effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch 47 is operated during the game, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed.

FIG. 38 is a time chart illustrating a lending notification sequence between the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200.
In the example of FIG. 38, as a situation before detecting the on of the rental switch 202 (before accepting the operation of the rental switch 202), the number of game media “10” is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100. Is stored, and it is assumed that the number of rentable game media "120" is stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the rental unit 200. Since the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100 is less than "50", "10" is counted when the counting switch 47 is operated.

After the activation of the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200 is completed and the lending switch 202 of the lending unit 200 is detected in a situation where the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200 can communicate with each other (the operation is accepted). Later) shows an example in which the gaming machine 10 notifies the gaming machine information with the serial number "n" and the number of gaming media "10" as the gaming machine information notification.
Next, as a counting notification, the counting serial number "m" and the number of counting game media "0" are transmitted. After receiving this counting notification, the rental serial number "k" and the number of rental game media "50" are transmitted as the rental notification. After transmitting the number of rental game media "50", the rental unit 200 updates the number of rental game media to "120-50 = 70". The timing at which the lending unit 200 updates the number of lending game media may be the timing at which the lending receipt result response is received.

Upon receiving the lending notice, the gaming machine 10 checks the consistency between the information indicated by the lending notice and the information indicated by the previous lending notice, and if the check result is normal (assuming that it is normal in this example). ), The lending serial number "k" and the lending point receipt result "normal" are transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the lending receipt result.
Next, the gaming machine 10 updates the number of gaming media to "10 + 50 = 60" between the time when the loan notification is received and the time when the loan receipt result response is transmitted.
At the timing when the gaming machine 10 next transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit 200, the serial number "n + 1" and the number of gaming media "60" are transmitted to the lending unit 200 as the gaming machine information notification. Further, as the counting notification, the counting serial number "m + 1", the counting game medium number "0", and the counting cumulative game medium number "0" are transmitted.

At this point, when it is continuously detected that the lending switch 202 of the lending unit 200 is turned on, the lending serial number "k + 1" and the number of lending game media "50" are used as a lending notification from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10. It is transmitted to the machine 10 (“* 1” in the figure). Then, the number of rentable game media is updated to "70-50 = 20". Further, the gaming machine 10 transmits the lending serial number “k + 1” and the lending point receipt result “normal” (assuming that the check result is normal) as a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200. Further, the gaming machine 10 updates the number of gaming media to "60 + 50 = 110" between the time when the loan notification is received and the time when the loan receipt result response is transmitted.
On the other hand, when the lending switch 202 is detected to be off at the timing when the lending unit 200 sends the lending notification of the lending serial number “k + 1” to the gaming machine 10, the lending notification of the number of lending game media “0” is sent. It is transmitted to the game machine 10 (“* 2” in the figure). In this case, the number of game media that can be rented remains "70". Further, the number of gaming media of the gaming machine 10 is still "60".

The lending unit 200 turns on / off the level data of the lending switch 202 every time a lending notification is transmitted (that is, every "300" ms) as a method of detecting that the lending switch 202 is turned from off to on. May be judged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each time the loan notification is transmitted, the on / off of the rising data of the loan switch 202 is determined. Therefore, in this case, even when the lending switch 202 is continuously turned on, the lending operation is accepted only at the timing of the first operation, so that the lending switch 202 is continuously turned on. Even so, the number of loaned game media is set to "0" at the timing of transmitting the second and subsequent loan notifications. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 38, even if the lending switch 202 is continuously detected to be turned on at the timing when the lending notification of the lending serial number “k + 1” is transmitted, the lending game medium number “0” is lent. The notification is transmitted to the game machine 10.

Further, when the number of counting game media is "1" or more (that is, both the lending switch 202 and the counting switch 47 are operated) as a counting notification transmitted from the game machine 10 when the lending switch 202 is detected to be turned on. When), the lending unit 200 sets the number of lending game media of the lending notification to be transmitted immediately after the counting notification to "0". The lending switch 202 received at this time may be invalidated, or the lending unit 200 stores the operation acceptance flag of the lending switch 202 and transmits it after the number of counting game media of the counting notification becomes "0". The number of rental game media may be transmitted as "50" in the rental notification.
Furthermore, when the lending unit 200 stores the operation acceptance flag of the lending switch 202, when the lending switch 202 is operated again while the flag related to the operation acceptance of the lending switch 202 is stored, the lending switch 202 is operated twice. It may be rewritten as a flag, or the second and subsequent operations may be invalidated.

Further, when the lending unit 200 transmits the lending notification to the gaming machine 10 and the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, the lending notification information is stored in the lending notification information storage area provided in the RWM 103 of the gaming medium number control board 100. Memorize all. Thereby, when the gaming machine 10 transmits the loan receipt result response, it is possible to determine whether the information of the loan point receipt result is "normal" or "abnormal".
Specifically, "k" is stored as the lending serial number in the lending notification information storage area, and when the lending serial number of the lending notification sent from the lending unit 200 is "k + 1", the stored "k" is stored. Is incremented to generate "k + 1" and compared with the received lending serial number "k + 1". In this case, since the generated lending serial number and the received lending serial number match, the received lending serial number "k + 1" is stored in the lending notification information storage area.

Further, when "k" is stored as the lending serial number in the lending notification information storage area and the lending serial number of the lending notification sent from the lending unit 200 is "k + 2", the stored "k" is incremented. Generates "k + 1" and compares it with the received rental serial number "k + 2". In this case, since the generated lending serial number and the received lending serial number do not match, the received lending serial number "k + 2" is not stored (the lending serial number in the lending notification information storage area remains "k").
Further, since the upper limit of the lending serial number is "255", if the lending serial number is incremented in the situation of "255", the lending serial number becomes "0". However, since the lending serial number "0" is a lending serial number that can be transmitted to the gaming machine 10 only immediately after the lending unit 200 is activated, the lending serial number is incremented again to be "1". In other words, when updating the lending serial number in the situation where the lending serial number is "255", the next lending serial number is set to "1" by performing the increment twice.

In the above example, as a method of comparing the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 with the lending serial number of the received lending notification, the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 is incremented and then the lending unit 200 is used. It was judged whether or not it matches the received loan serial number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to decrement the rental serial number received from the rental unit 200 and then compare whether or not it matches the rental serial number stored in the gaming machine 10.
Further, the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 may be subtracted from the lending serial number received from the lending unit 200, and it may be determined whether or not the result is "1".

Subsequently, a timer for transmitting the gaming machine information notification (hereinafter, referred to as “game machine information notification timer”) will be described.
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a gaming machine information notification timer and a gaming machine information notification request flag.
The gaming machine information notification timer includes a gaming machine information notification timer A (_TM_INF_CTL_A), a gaming machine information notification timer B (_TM_INF_CTL_B), and a gaming machine information notification timer C (_TM_INF_CTL_C).
The gaming machine information notification timer A is a timer for determining the timing of transmitting the hall computer / fraud monitoring information every "300" ms.
The gaming machine information notification timer B is a timer for determining the timing at which the gaming machine installation information is transmitted every "60" seconds.
The gaming machine information notification timer C is a timer for determining the timing at which the gaming machine performance information is transmitted every "180" seconds.

The RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is provided with storage areas of the game machine information notification timers A to C, and timer values are stored in each storage area.
The storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer A is composed of "2" bytes, and the gaming machine information notification timers B and C are composed of "1" bytes.
Each storage area of the gaming machine information notification timers A to C is initialized (cleared, "0" is stored) when the power is turned on.
As described above, the blinking switching cycle of the role ratio monitor 113 is "300" ms, and the RWM 103 is provided with "blinking switching time (_TM_CHG_FLS)" as a timer area for managing the blinking switching time, and is further lit. The RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS)" as a flag for determining whether the light is off or off.
On the other hand, the gaming machine information notification timer A measures "300" ms, which is the same as the blinking switching cycle, but is in a timer area separate from the blinking switching time.

In the following description, the storage area of the game machine information notification timer A, the storage area of the game machine information notification timer B, and the storage area of the game machine information notification timer C are simply referred to as the game machine information notification timer A and the game machine information notification timer, respectively. B, abbreviated as game machine information notification timer C.
Further, the value stored in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer A, the value stored in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer B, and the value stored in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer C are simply stored. It is abbreviated as the value of the game machine information notification timer A, the value of the game machine information notification timer B, and the value of the game machine information notification timer C.

In the second embodiment, the CPU 105 of the game medium number control board 100 executes the timer interrupt process every "1" ms. Then, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated every time this timer interrupt is performed (every "1" ms).
The gaming machine information notification timer A is a decrement timer, and as described above, “0” is stored as its value when the power is turned on. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A circulates in the range of "0" to "300 (D)".
Therefore, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" when the power is turned on, updated to "300" when the first timer interrupt is executed, and "300" when the next timer interrupt is executed. It will be updated to "299".
Furthermore, when "1" is subtracted in the interrupt processing under the condition that the value before the update is "0" such as when the power is turned on, the value is updated to "300", and when the value is subtracted by "1" in the next interrupt processing. Updated to "299".
On the other hand, in interrupt processing in which the value before update is "1", when "1" is subtracted, the subtraction result becomes "0", but in this case, "300" is immediately stored in the interrupt processing. Will be done.
therefore,
"0"->"300"->"299"->...->"2"->"1"->("0"->)"300"->"299"-> ...
It is updated like.

The gaming machine information notification timer B is an increment timer, and as described above, “0” is stored as its value when the power is turned on. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer B circulates in the range of "0" to "199 (D)".
therefore,
"0"->"1"->"2"->...->"198"->"199"->"0"->"1"-> ...
It is updated like.
The value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is "+1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A becomes "300". However, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized when the power is turned on and "0" is stored, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A becomes "300" in the first timer interrupt processing, , The value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is not updated and remains "0". This control will be described later.

The gaming machine information notification timer C is an increment timer, and as described above, “0” is stored as its value when the power is turned on. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer C circulates in the range of "0" to "2 (D)".
therefore,
"0"->"1"->"2"->"0"->"1"-> ...
It is updated like.
The value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is "+1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0". However, when "0" is stored because the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is initialized when the power is turned on, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C also remains the initialized "0". Yes, it is not updated to "1" at this point.

The gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is whether or not it is the timing to notify the gaming machine performance information (timing every 180 seconds), and the timing to notify the gaming machine installation information (timing every 60 seconds). It is a flag indicating whether or not there is, and is provided as a 1-byte storage area in the RWM 103 of the gaming medium number control board 100.
The initial value (all bits "0") of the gaming machine information notification request flag is stored by the initialization process when the power is turned on.
The gaming machine information notification request flag includes a gaming machine performance information notification request flag and a gaming machine installation information request flag.

The game machine performance information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the cycle (timing) for transmitting the game machine performance information has arrived among the game machine information notifications, and is a game machine information notification request. Use the "D0" bit of the flag. When the "D0" bit is "1", it indicates that the cycle for transmitting the gaming machine performance information has arrived, and when it is "0", the cycle for transmitting the gaming machine performance information has not arrived. Is shown. Further, when the gaming machine performance information notification is transmitted, it is updated from "1" to "0".
Further, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the cycle (timing) for transmitting the gaming machine installation information has arrived in the gaming machine information notification, and the gaming machine information. Use the "D1" bit of the notification request flag. When the "D0" bit is "1", it indicates that the cycle for transmitting the gaming machine installation information has arrived, and when it is "0", the cycle for transmitting the gaming machine installation information has not arrived. Is shown. Further, when the notification of the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, it is updated from "1" to "0".
It is also possible to set the gaming machine performance information notification request flag as a 1-byte storage area and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag as another 1-byte storage area. However, as in the present embodiment, the game machine information notification request flag is provided as a 1-byte storage area, and the game machine performance information notification request flag and the game machine installation information notification request flag are assigned to the bits of this 1-byte storage area. For example, the storage capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing an update sequence of each value of the gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C.
In FIG. 40, the gaming machine information notification including the hall control / fraud monitoring information based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is referred to as “notification A”, and includes the gaming machine installation information based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B. The gaming machine information notification is referred to as "notification B", and the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine performance information based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is referred to as "notification C".
First, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the initialization process of the RWM 103 of the gaming medium number control board 100 is executed, whereby the values of the gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C are cleared ( "0" is stored).

The CPU 105 of the game medium number control board 100 includes a flag register (F register). The flag register includes a carry flag (CY) and a zero flag (Z). The flag register also includes flags other than these flags, but the description thereof will be omitted in the present embodiment.
The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when it becomes less than "0" as a result of arithmetic processing, in other words, when a carry occurs.
The zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when it becomes "0" as a result of arithmetic processing.

Specific examples of the carry flag and the zero flag are as follows.
Example 1) If the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is subtracted by "1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "10", the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "9". At this time, the zero flag and the carry flag do not change (remains "0").
Example 2) If the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is subtracted by "1" when the value is "1", the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "0". As a result, the zero flag becomes "1". On the other hand, the carry flag does not change (it remains "0"). Here, in the arithmetic processing of the present embodiment, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" and the zero flag becomes "1", immediately after that ("1" is set. As a result of the subtraction, it is updated to "300" (during interrupt processing which was updated to "0").

Example 3) If the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is subtracted by "1" when the value is "0", the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "300". At this time, the zero flag does not change (it remains "0"). On the other hand, the carry flag is "1".
The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before subtraction is "0" only when it is initialized after the power is turned on. Therefore, the carry flag becomes "1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "0" to "300" in the first interrupt processing after the power is turned on.

When either the carry flag or the zero flag becomes "1" as a result of updating the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A, it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can transmit the notification A to the rental unit 200. In FIG. 40, after the gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized to "0" by turning on the power, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "0" to "300" by the first interrupt processing. This indicates that the notification A is transmitted when the carry flag (CY) becomes "1" ("* 1" in the figure).

Next, an interrupt is executed every "1" ms, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "299", "298", ..., But either the carry flag or the zero flag is " If it does not become "1", it is not determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived, so the notification A is not transmitted. Since "60" seconds and "180" seconds are also multiples of "300" ms, naturally, notification B and notification C are not transmitted either.
As described above, the carry flag is set to "1" by updating the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A only in the first interrupt processing after the power is turned on, but after that, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set. The carry flag will not be set to "1" by updating.

When the number of interrupts reaches "300" (that is, after "300" ms) from the time when the first notification A is transmitted ("* 1" in the figure), the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set. , "1" is updated to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1". Therefore, it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived. As a result, the gaming machine 10 transmits the notification A to the lending unit 200 (“* 2” in the figure).

Next, when the number of interrupts reaches "6000" from the time of transmission of the first notification A ("* 1" in the figure), that is, when "60" seconds have elapsed, the timer value and the like are updated as follows. ..
First, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1"("*3" in the figure. "). Therefore, it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived.
Second, the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated from "199" to "0". When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated to "0", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification B has arrived, and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is "1". Will be updated to.

At this point, the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived, and the transmission timing of the notification B has arrived. Therefore, since the notification B is transmitted with priority over the notification A, the notification B is transmitted at this timing (“* 4” in the figure). When the notification B is transmitted, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is updated to "0".
Then, after "300" ms has elapsed from that timing, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated again from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) is set to "1". become. Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived, and the notification A is transmitted ("* 5" in the figure).

As described above, when the transmission of the notification B is prioritized at the transmission timing of "* 3" in the figure, the notification A is not transmitted at that timing, and "* 5" after "300" ms has elapsed from that timing. Notification A is transmitted at the timing of.
Here, when the notification A is transmitted at the timing of "* 5" in the figure, the hall control / fraud monitoring information acquired immediately before the transmission is stored in a predetermined transmission register, and the hall control / fraud monitoring is stored. A gaming machine information notification containing information is transmitted.
In other words, after the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired at the transmission timing of "* 3" in the figure and stored in the predetermined transmission register, the hall control / fraud monitoring is performed at the timing of "* 5" in the figure. No information is sent.

When it is determined that the notification A is not transmitted at the transmission timing of "* 3" in the figure, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information at that time may be configured not to be stored in the predetermined transmission register. However, due to the simplification of processing, when the transmission timing of the notification A arrives, the hall control / fraud monitoring information at that time is uniformly stored in the predetermined transmission register. Then, every "300" ms, in other words, every time the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", the hall controller / fraud monitoring information at that time may be stored (overwritten) in a predetermined transmission register.

Next, when the number of interrupts reaches "18000" from the time of transmission of the first notification A ("* 1" in the figure), that is, when "180" seconds have elapsed, the timer value or the like is updated as follows. ..
First, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1"("*6" in the figure). ). Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived.

Second, the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated from "199" to "0". When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated to "0", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification B has arrived, and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is "1". Is updated to ("* 7" in the figure).
Thirdly, the gaming machine information notification timer C is updated from "2" to "0". When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is updated to "0", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification C has arrived, and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is "1". Is updated to ("* 8" in the figure).

At this point, the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived, the transmission timing of the notification B has arrived, and the transmission timing of the notification C has arrived. Therefore, the transmission timings of the notification A, the notification B, and the notification C all overlap. In this case, since the notification B is transmitted with the first priority, the notification B is transmitted at this timing (“* 7” in the figure). In other words, notification A and notification C are not transmitted at that timing. When the notification B is transmitted, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is updated to "0". Since the notification C has not been transmitted at this point, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) remains “1”.

When "300" ms elapses from this timing and the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification arrives, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"). , The zero flag (Z) becomes "1"("*9" in the figure). Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived.
Further, at this timing, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is set to "1". Therefore, the transmission timing of the notification C has arrived. Then, when the transmission timings of the notification A and the notification C overlap, the transmission of the notification C has priority, so that the notification C is transmitted (“* 10” in the figure). In other words, the notification A is not transmitted at that timing. When the notification C is transmitted, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is updated to "0".

When "300" ms elapses from this point, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1". ("* 11" in the figure). Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived. Further, at this point, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) are both "0", so that it is not the transmission timing of the notification B and the notification. It is not the transmission timing of C. Therefore, at this timing, the notification A is transmitted (“* 11” in the figure).

When the notification A is transmitted at the timing of "* 11" in the figure, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information acquired immediately before the transmission is stored in a predetermined transmission register and includes the hole controller / fraud monitoring information. A game machine information notification is sent. In other words, it is not the hall control / fraud monitoring information acquired at the timing of "* 6" or "* 9" in the figure.

As described above, when either the carry flag or the zero flag becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived.
Therefore, in the combination monitor 113 described above, the control is different from the control of switching between lighting and extinguishing when the carry flag becomes “0” as a result of updating the blinking switching time.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing game machine information management.
Here, the "game machine information management" is a control process for transmitting the game machine information notification from the game machine 10 to the rental unit 200. The process of FIG. 41 is one subroutine in the timer interrupt process executed by the game medium number control board 100. In other words, the gaming machine information management is executed every time the timer interrupt processing is executed (in a cycle of "1" ms).
First, in step S721, "1" is subtracted from the gaming machine information notification timer A (the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S722, and it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is “0”. When the carry flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S721, it is determined that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0". Since the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update was "0", the carry flag is set to "1" because the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" when the power is turned on. Corresponds to the case where "1" is subtracted after (initialized). When it is determined that the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0", the process proceeds to step S733, and when it is determined that the timer A is not "0", the process proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1". In other words, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A has become "0" due to the update, and in other words, whether or not the zero flag has become "1" due to the update. When it is determined that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1", the process proceeds to step S724, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1", it means that it is the timing of the "300" ms cycle, that is, the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the hall controller / fraud monitoring information. ..

On the other hand, when it is not the transmission timing of the notification A, it is not the timing of the "300" ms cycle, so it is neither the transmission timing of the "60" second cycle nor the transmission timing of the "180" second cycle. In other words, it is neither the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information nor the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information including the gaming machine performance information. Therefore, when it is determined that it is not the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information including the hall control / fraud monitoring information, whether or not it is the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information are included. The game machine information management is terminated without determining whether or not it is the transmission timing of the game machine installation information. As a result, the program processing can be simplified and the game machine information management can be speeded up.

In step S724, the initial value is saved in the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A. Here, the initial value is "300 (D)". Since the timer interrupt cycle of the gaming medium number control board 100 in the present embodiment is "1" ms, by storing "300 (D)" as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A, "300" ms Counting is possible. Therefore, when the calculation result becomes "0" by the subtraction in step S721, "300" is immediately stored in step S724.
For example, when the timer interrupt cycle of the gaming medium number control board 100 is "2" ms, "150 (D)" may be stored in the gaming machine information notification timer A.
Further, for example, when the timer interrupt cycle of the gaming medium number control board 100 is set to "2.235" ms, the gaming machine information notification timer A stores any value in the range of "135" to "138". Just do it. In this way, when the "transmission cycle of the gaming machine information notification / timer interrupt cycle" does not become an integer (when it is not divisible), the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification is between "300" ms and "310" ms. Any value can be set as the initial value.

An example of the arithmetic instruction in step S721 described above is the DCPWLD instruction. The DCPWLD instruction is an instruction to store a predetermined value when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1". The predetermined value in this embodiment is "300". Therefore, after the game machine information notification timer A is initialized to "0" after the power is turned on, if "1" is subtracted in step S721 in the game machine information management process in the first interrupt process, the carry The flag becomes "1" and the predetermined value "300" is stored.
In this way, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" by the initialization process when the power is turned on, but other than that, except for the period after the process of step S721 and before the process of step S724. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A never becomes "0" (except when an abnormality occurs).

In the next step S725, a process of adding the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B by "1" is executed. A special addition instruction is used for the addition process here. Specifically, when a value less than "199" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B, "1" is added to the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes. When it is not less than "199" (that is, when "199" is stored under normal operating conditions), it is an arithmetic process for storing "0" in the gaming machine information notification timer B.

Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1) When "0" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B, the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" results in "1".
Example 2) When "100" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "101". Become.
Example 3) When "199" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "200". It becomes "0" instead of "". For example, in FIG. 40 described above, it corresponds to the calculation at the timing of “* 4”.

In this way, when the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B is performed, "0" to "199" can be circulated as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B. can.
Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "199" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B means that the opportunity for the gaming machine information notification timer A to become "0" has arrived "200" times. Corresponds to the situation. In other words, the gaming machine information notification timer B is added by "1" every time the interrupt processing is executed "300" times, so that the interrupt processing of "300 times x 200 times = 60,000 times" is executed ( The situation (“60” seconds have passed).

Then, originally, in order to measure whether or not the interrupt processing is executed "60,000" times, a storage area of "2" bytes must be provided. However, by updating the gaming machine information notification timer B based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A, the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer B can be set to "1" bytes, and the storage capacity of the RWM 103 can be increased. Can be reduced.
Further, as an arithmetic instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B, an ICPLD instruction can be mentioned.
In the above example, the instruction to add "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B is executed, but the instruction to subtract "1" may be used. In the case of the subtraction command, "200" may be stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then "200" may be stored when the value becomes "0". Alternatively, "199" may be stored as an initial value in the gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then "200" may be stored when the carry flag becomes "1".

Further, since the update of the game machine information notification timer B is used as the addition command, the process of setting the initial value can be omitted as compared with the case of the subtraction command (the initial value is "0" due to the initialization process at the time of power-on). Therefore, the processing speed can be improved and the program capacity can be reduced.

In step S726, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed. Here, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0" by adding "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed. On the other hand, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B does not become "0" due to the addition of "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has not elapsed.
When it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S727, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S731.
In step S727, a process of adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is executed.
A special addition instruction is used for the addition process here. Specifically, when a value less than "2" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B, "1" is added to the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is changed. When it is not less than "2" (that is, when "3" is stored under normal operating conditions), it is an arithmetic process for storing "0" in the gaming machine information notification timer C.

Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1) When "0" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C, the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" results in "1".
Example 2) When "1" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "2". Become.
Example 3) When "2" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "3". It becomes "0" instead of "". For example, in FIG. 40 described above, it corresponds to the calculation at the timing of “* 8”.

In this way, when the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is performed, "0" to "2" can be circulated as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C. can.
Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "2" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C means that the opportunity for the gaming machine information notification timer B to become "0" has arrived "3" times. Corresponds to the situation. In other words, the gaming machine information notification timer B is added by "1" every time the interrupt processing is executed "300" times, and the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated every "200" times. Since "1" is added to C, the interrupt processing of "300 times x 200 times x 3 times = 180,000 times" is executed ("180" seconds have passed).

Originally, a storage area of "3" bytes must be provided in order to measure whether or not "180,000" interrupt processing has been executed, but it is based on the value of the game machine information notification timer A. Since the value of the game machine information notification timer B is updated and the value of the game machine information notification timer C is updated based on the value of the game machine information notification timer B, the storage area of the game machine information notification timer C is set to "1". It can be a byte, and the storage capacity of the RWM 103 can be reduced.
Further, as an arithmetic instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C, the above-mentioned ICPLD instruction can be mentioned.
In the above example, the instruction to add "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is executed, but it may be a subtraction instruction. In the case of the subtraction command, the initial value "3" may be stored as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then "3" may be stored when the value becomes "0". Alternatively, the initial value "2" may be stored as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then "3" may be stored when the carry flag becomes "1".

However, if the update of the game machine information notification timer C is an addition instruction as in the present embodiment, the process of setting the initial value can be omitted as compared with the case of the subtraction instruction (initialization process at the time of power-on). Therefore, the initial value becomes "0"), so that the processing speed can be improved and the program capacity can be reduced.

In step S728, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. Here, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "0" by adding "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. On the other hand, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C does not become "0" due to the addition of "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has not elapsed.
When it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S729, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S730.

It should be noted that the process of step S727 is executed only when it is determined as "Yes" in step S726. This is because the timing for updating the gaming machine information notification timer C is limited to when the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes “0”. Further, in the next step S728, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed only when it is determined as "Yes" in step S726. Whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed depends on whether or not the cycle of "180" seconds has arrived, and the cycle of "180" seconds always arrives in the cycle of "60" seconds. Is coming (the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has passed).

In step S729, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag. In the next step S730, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag.
That is, when it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, it means that the cycle of "180" seconds has arrived, and the cycle of "180" seconds includes the cycle of "60" seconds. Therefore, the timing for notifying the gaming machine performance information has arrived, and the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information has arrived. Therefore, both the "D0" and "D1" bits of the gaming machine information notification request flag are set to "1".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S726 that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed and the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has not elapsed, the cycle is "60" seconds. (Timing to notify the gaming machine installation information) has arrived, but the cycle of "180" seconds (timing to notify the gaming machine performance information) has not arrived. Therefore, in this case, the process of step S729 is not executed, only the process of step S730 is executed, and only the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "1".

In this way, in order to manage the timing of transmitting the game machine installation information and the timing of transmitting the game machine performance information with the flag, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information, the game machine installation information, and the game machine performance information are transmitted. The process to be performed can be simplified. In other words, by interlocking timers corresponding to various information, it is possible to transmit without managing them individually. Further, since the measurement start timing of the timer for transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the game machine installation information, and the game machine performance information does not deviate, it is possible to transmit accurately.

In the next step S731, it is determined whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information. Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. Therefore, if the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is "1", it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, and the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag must be "1". If so, it is judged that there is no request for notification of the gaming machine installation information.
If it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S734, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S732.
In step S732, it is determined whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information. Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. Therefore, if the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is "1", it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information, and the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag must be "1". If so, it is judged that there is no notification request for the gaming machine performance information.
If it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information, the process proceeds to step S736, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine performance information, the process proceeds to step S733.

In step S733, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information transmission process is executed. Here, the hall control / fraud monitoring information stored in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is acquired, the information is stored in the transmission register, and the information is transmitted. Then, after transmission, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When it is determined in step S722 that the value before the update of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "0", whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B or the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. (Processing in step S726 and step S728) is not executed, but the processing of transmitting the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is executed. The reason is that the value before the update of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "0" only at the time of the subtraction processing in the first interrupt processing immediately after the power is turned on. In other words, it is impossible that "60" seconds or "180" seconds have elapsed during the subtraction process in the first interrupt process immediately after the power is turned on. In such a case, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information transmission process is executed without executing the determination of whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B or the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. It is possible to speed up the processing (speed up the transmission processing).

Further, in step S731, it is determined whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S732 and there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information. It is a processing order to judge whether or not. By adopting such a processing order, in the situation where both the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag are set (the situation where the "180" second cycle has arrived), first By determining whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the transmission processing of the gaming machine installation information can be executed (priority can be given) before the transmission processing of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, as described above, in the transmission of the hall control / fraud monitoring information in step S733, the latest information at that time is transmitted.
For example, as for the (total) number of game media included in the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the information stored in the number of game media storage means 103a (_NB_MEDAL) at the time of transmission is transmitted. In other words, if the transmission timing of the hall control / fraud monitoring information, which is the transmission timing of every "300" ms, coincides with the transmission timing of the game machine installation information or the game machine performance information, the game machine installation information or the game machine Since the transmission of performance information is prioritized, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is not transmitted at that timing, and after the next "300" ms has elapsed (when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information) or "600" ms. After the lapse of time (when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information), the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted. The "hall-con / fraud monitoring information to be transmitted after the lapse of" 300 "ms or after the lapse of" 600 "ms" is not the hall-con / fraud monitoring information at the time when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, but " This is the hall control / fraud monitoring information acquired at the timing of transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information after the lapse of 300 "ms or after the passage of" 600 "ms. Therefore, even if the transmission timing of the hall control / fraud monitoring information is delayed, the latest information can be transmitted.

In addition, after the transmission processing of the hall control / fraud monitoring information is completed, the serial number is updated (“1” is added). Similar to the counting serial number, the serial number also transmits "0" as the serial number at the time of transmission immediately after the power is restored, and after that, any one of "1" to "255" can be transmitted ("1" to "~". It is updated (to circulate "255"). This serial number is a serial number that is updated when any one of the three information of hall control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information is transmitted. In other words, since the same serial number is used for hall control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, the serial number is updated at a cycle of "300" ms when the power is turned on. It is configured to be.

Proceeding from step S731 to step S734, the game machine installation information transmission process is executed. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the game medium number control board 100 acquired at this timing. Next, the process proceeds to step S735, and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "0". In addition, after the processing of transmitting the gaming machine installation information is completed, the serial number is updated (“1” is added). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S732 to step S736, the game machine performance information transmission process is executed. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the game medium number control board 100 acquired at this timing. Next, the process proceeds to step S735, and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "0". In addition, after the processing of transmitting the gaming machine performance information is completed, the serial number is updated (“1” is added). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Subsequently, the relationship between the gaming machine information notification timers A to C and the information stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 will be described.
As described above, the storage areas of the game machine information notification timers A to C are provided in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100. Then, these storage areas are cleared (“0” is stored) by the initialization process when the power is turned on.
On the other hand, the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is provided with, for example, the following data storage area as the data storage area required for lighting control of the role ratio monitor 113, in addition to the data storage area described above. There is.
"400" game count counter (counter for counting "400" games)
Total number of grants Ring buffer "0" to "14" (each buffer that counts the total number of grants between "400" games)
Number of continuous bonuses granted Ring buffers "0" to "14" (buffers that count the number of consecutive bonuses granted between "400" games, respectively)
Number of bonuses granted Ring buffers "0" to "14" (buffers that count the number of bonuses granted between "400" games, respectively)
Total number of games counter (storage area of count value of total number of games)
Advantageous section game count counter (storage area for the number of games played in the advantageous section)
Total number of grants counter (storage area of count value of total number of grants)
Instructed number counter (storage area for the number given when the instruction function is activated)
Continuous bonus grant count counter (storage area for the number of grants when the continuous bonus is activated)
Counter for the number of grants (storage area for the number of grants when the bonus is activated)
Instructed accessory ratio data (storage area of the calculated indicated accessory ratio)
Advantageous section ratio data (storage area of the calculated advantageous section ratio)
Continuous bonus ratio data (storage area of the calculated continuous bonus ratio)
Character ratio data (storage area of calculated character ratio)
Characteristic state ratio data (storage area of the calculated character status ratio)
Blinking switching time (storage area of count value related to blinking switching time) (described above)
Blinking switching flag (storage area of the flag for determining whether to turn on or off) (described above)
The data storage area is a part of the data storage area required for lighting control of the combination monitor 113, and is not limited to the above.

Of the above storage areas, the ring buffer, the game count counter, the grant count counter, and the ratio data storage areas are not initialized by the power on / off or the setting change process. This is to display the correct ratio that reflects the past game history even if the power is turned on / off or the setting is changed.
However, when an unrecoverable error such as an RWM error occurs, all the above storage areas are initialized. This is to prevent leaving invalid data after returning.
On the other hand, the blinking switching time and the blinking switching flag are initialized (cleared) by turning the power on / off or changing the setting. As a result, the display of the test pattern can be executed for "4800" ms each time the power is turned on. Further, even when the blinking display is performed after the power is turned on, the lighting can be started from the first lighting "3" seconds.

Further, in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50, in addition to the bet number storage means 53a and the grant number storage means 53b shown in FIG. 29, for example, the following data storage areas are provided.
Input port level data (data storage area for determining whether each switch is in operation)
Input port rising data (data storage area for determining whether each switch has been operated)
Section type number (storage area of numbers for managing advantageous sections)
MY counter (storage area of difference number)
Prize and replay condition device number (storage area for the number of the prize and replay condition device that operates in the game)
Character condition device number (storage area of the number of the character condition device that operates in the game)
Minimum game period (timer value storage area for monitoring the minimum game period ("4.1" seconds) of one game)
Game standby display time (timer value storage area that measures the time until transition to game standby)
The above data storage area is a part of the data storage area of the RWM 53, and is not limited to the above.

Further, since the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is a medalless gaming machine, it is provided in a gaming machine that uses medals as tangible objects, for example, the following storage areas are not provided.
Blocker signal (blocker on / off storage area)
Hopper motor drive signal (hopper motor on / off storage area)
Payout sensor check time (timer value storage area for detecting medal clogging)
Blocker monitoring time (timer value storage area indicating blocker on / off standby time)
Medal payout control time (timer value storage area indicating the control time of the medal payout device)

In the above storage area of RWM53, for example, the minimum game time is not initialized by turning the power on / off. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the first measurement of the game time, when the power is turned on after that, the measurement of the minimum game time is restarted, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the game is started. The start (start of rotation of the reel 31) is permitted.
Therefore, the minimum gaming time and the gaming machine information notification timers A to C are common in that they both store timer values for measuring the time, but whether or not they are initialized by turning the power on / off. Is different.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 can communicate with each other via the gaming medium number control board 100 and the connection terminal board 130, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 50 and the connection terminal board are not limited to this. The 130 may be connected so that the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 can communicate with each other via the main control board 50 and the connection terminal plate 130. If the configuration is as described above and the game medium number control board 100 is not mounted, the production cost can be reduced.
In this case, the main control board 50 performs all the processing controlled by the game medium number control board 100. Further, when the function of the main control board 50 and the function of the game medium number control board 100 are realized on the same board, the functions of the CPU 55 that controls the function of the main control board 50 and the game medium number control board 100 are controlled. By separately providing the CPU 105, it is possible to realize the same processing as that of the above-described embodiment.

(2) In the above embodiment, the gaming machine installation information transmitted every "60" seconds is given first priority, and then the gaming machine performance information transmitted every "180" seconds is given second priority. However, this is an example, for example, when there is a gaming machine information notification 1 transmitted every "T1" seconds and a gaming machine information notification 2 transmitted every "T2" seconds (T2> T1), the gaming machine The specification may be such that the information notification 2 is transmitted with priority over the gaming machine information notification 1.

(3) The storage areas of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 and the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 are generally divided into a used area and a non-used area.
Here, "in the used area" refers to an area in the RWM storage area for storing data related to the progress of the game.
On the other hand, “outside the used area” refers to an area in the RWM storage area for storing data not related to the progress of the game.
Therefore, since the data related to the display control of the combination monitor 113 is not related to the progress of the game, it is generally stored outside the area used by the RWM.
For example, when the display control of the combination monitor is executed on the main control board 50, the data related to the display control of the combination monitor is stored outside the area used by the RWM 53. As a result, it is possible to try to squeeze the storage capacity in the used area of the RWM53.

However, not limited to this, when the display control of the combination monitor 113 is executed by the game medium number control board 100, the storage capacity in the used area of the RWM 103 may be compressed by the data related to the display control of the combination monitor 113. It is also possible to provide a data storage area related to the display control of the role ratio monitor 113 in the used area of the RWM 103.
(4) In the above embodiment, the slot machine (rotary body type gaming machine) is shown as the gaming machine 10, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be applied to various gaming models such as casino machines. Is.

<Additional notes>
Examples of the inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification of the present application include the following initial inventions 1 to 13, respectively, in order to solve the problems to be solved by the initial invention and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. The means and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification does not mean that the invention is limited to the initial inventions 1 to 13.

1. 1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be solved by the initial invention 1 The initial invention relates to a game machine that uses electronic information (electronic medals) as a game value (game medium) without using physical medals (as tangible objects). Is.
In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that uses electronic information without using a physical medal as a gaming value is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-062558).
Here, in a gaming machine including a main control board that controls the progress of the game and a payout control board that manages the number of credits of the game value, a power failure occurs while a command is being transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. And. At this time, on the main control board side, based on the operation of the bet switch, a command indicating that the game value has been bet is turned on, the operation of the start switch can be accepted, and the game value is bet. Is sent to the payout control board, but the command cannot be received on the payout control board side, and the process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits may not be executed. Be done. In this case, the game value cannot be managed appropriately, and there is a risk of giving a disadvantage to the player.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately manage the game value in a game machine that uses electronic information as the game value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a payout control board (100) that manages the number of credits for game value (electronic medals)
The payout control board is electrically connected to the main control board and is electrically connected to an external management device (200) that controls the lending and refund of the game value.
When an event (bet, grant, cancellation) that increases or decreases the number of credits occurs, the main control board requests an operation request command (input request command, payout request command, return request) that requests an increase or decrease in the number of credits. Command) is sent to the payout control board,
When the payout control board receives the calculation request command, the payout control board executes a process of adding or subtracting the number corresponding to the received calculation request command to the number of credits, and the calculation repeat command corresponding to the received calculation request command. (Input repeat command, payout repeat command, return repeat command) is transmitted to the main control board,
When the main control board receives the calculation repeat command, the main control board performs a process according to the occurrence of an event of increasing or decreasing the number of credits (for example, a process of turning on the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, the start switch 41. Processing to make the operation acceptable, processing to display the number of electronic medals granted to the acquired number display LED 78, processing to turn off the 1-bet display LED to 3-bet display LED, processing to make the operation of the start switch 41 unacceptable) Run and
When the power is turned off, the program on the payout control board is set to stop before the program on the main control board.
When returning from a power failure, the program on the payout control board is set to start before the program on the main control board.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the original invention, when the main control board receives the effect repeat command, the payout control board executes a process according to the occurrence of an event that increases or decreases the number of credits. By stopping the above program first, it is possible to prevent the subsequent processing from being executed unless the production repeat command is received, so the game value is appropriately set so as not to disadvantage the player. Can be managed.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 2 The initial invention relates to a game machine that uses electronic information (electronic medals) as a game value (game medium) without using physical medals (as tangible objects). Is.
In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that uses electronic information without using a physical medal as a gaming value is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-062558).
Here, in a gaming machine including a main control board that controls the progress of the game and a payout control board that manages the number of credits of the game value, noise is generated while a command is being transmitted from the payout control board to the management device (CR unit). Suppose you have entered. At this time, although the payout control board side has executed the process related to the refund of the game value, the management device side cannot receive the command and the process related to the refund of the game value is not executed. It is possible that it will occur. In this case, the game value cannot be managed appropriately, and there is a risk of giving a disadvantage to the player.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately manage the game value in a game machine that uses electronic information as the game value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution of the original invention is
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a payout control board (100) that manages the number of credits for game value (electronic medals)
The payout control board is electrically connected to the main control board and is electrically connected to an external management device (200) that controls the lending and refund of the game value.
When an event (bet, grant, cancellation) that increases or decreases the number of credits occurs, the main control board requests an operation request command (input request command, payout request command, return request) that requests an increase or decrease in the number of credits. Command) is sent to the payout control board,
When the payout control board receives the calculation request command, the payout control board executes a process of adding or subtracting the number corresponding to the received calculation request command to the number of credits, and the calculation repeat command corresponding to the received calculation request command. (Input repeat command, payout repeat command, return repeat command) is transmitted to the main control board,
When the main control board receives the calculation repeat command, the main control board performs a process according to the occurrence of an event of increasing or decreasing the number of credits (for example, a process of turning on the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, the start switch 41. Processing to make the operation acceptable, processing to display the number of electronic medals granted to the acquired number display LED 78, processing to turn off the 1-bet display LED to 3-bet display LED, processing to make the operation of the start switch 41 unacceptable) Run and
The payout control board is
When requesting the management device to execute processing (refund of credited electronic medals), a processing request command (upper count request command, lower count request command) is transmitted to the management device.
When the management device that has received the processing request command receives a processing repeat command (upper count repeat command, lower count repeat command) to be transmitted to the payout control board, the management device is instructed to execute the process. It is characterized in that a processing instruction command (counting instruction command) to be executed is transmitted to the management device.

The second solution of the original invention is
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
A payout control board (100) that manages the number of credits for game value (electronic medals),
Equipped with a counting switch (47) that is operated when refunding the credited game value,
The payout control board is electrically connected to the main control board and is electrically connected to an external management device (200) that controls the lending and refund of the game value.
The counting switch is electrically connected to the payout control board.
When an event (bet, grant, cancellation) that increases or decreases the number of credits occurs, the main control board requests an operation request command (input request command, payout request command, return request) that requests an increase or decrease in the number of credits. Command) is sent to the payout control board,
When the payout control board receives the calculation request command, the payout control board executes a process of adding or subtracting the number corresponding to the received calculation request command to the number of credits, and the calculation repeat command corresponding to the received calculation request command. (Input repeat command, payout repeat command, return repeat command) is transmitted to the main control board,
When the main control board receives the calculation repeat command, the main control board performs a process according to the occurrence of an event of increasing or decreasing the number of credits (for example, a process of turning on the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, the start switch 41. Processing to make the operation acceptable, processing to display the number of electronic medals granted to the acquired number display LED 78, processing to turn off the 1-bet display LED to 3-bet display LED, processing to make the operation of the start switch 41 unacceptable) Run and
The payout control board is
When the counting switch is operated, a refund request command (upper counting request command, lower counting request command) requesting a refund of the credited game value is transmitted to the management device.
When the management device that has received the refund request command receives a refund repeat command (upper count repeat command, lower count repeat command) transmitted to the payout control board, the payout control board side regarding the refund of the game value It is characterized in that the process is executed and the refund instruction command (counting instruction command) corresponding to the received refund repeat command is transmitted to the management device.

The third solution of the original invention is
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a payout control board (100) that manages the number of credits for game value (electronic medals)
The payout control board is electrically connected to the main control board and is electrically connected to an external management device (200) that controls the lending and refund of the game value.
The management device is provided with a lending switch (202) that is operated when lending the game value.
When an event (bet, grant, cancellation) that increases or decreases the number of credits occurs, the main control board requests an operation request command (input request command, payout request command, return request) that requests an increase or decrease in the number of credits. Command) is sent to the payout control board,
When the payout control board receives the calculation request command, the payout control board executes a process of adding or subtracting the number corresponding to the received calculation request command to the number of credits, and the calculation repeat command corresponding to the received calculation request command. (Input repeat command, payout repeat command, return repeat command) is transmitted to the main control board,
When the main control board receives the calculation repeat command, the main control board performs a process according to the occurrence of an event of increasing or decreasing the number of credits (for example, a process of turning on the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, the start switch 41. Processing to make the operation acceptable, processing to display the number of electronic medals granted to the acquired number display LED 78, processing to turn off the 1-bet display LED to 3-bet display LED, processing to make the operation of the start switch 41 unacceptable) Run and
The payout control board is
When the management device receives a lending request command to be transmitted to the payout control board when the lending switch is operated, a lending repeat command corresponding to the received lending request command is transmitted to the management device.
When the management device that has received the lending repeat command receives the lending instruction command to be transmitted to the payout control board, it is characterized in that the process on the payout control board side regarding the lending of the game value is executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, when the payout control board requests the management device to execute the process, the management device transmits the process request command to the management device, and the management device that receives the process request command receives the process request command. When a process repeat command to be sent to the payout control board is received, a process instruction command instructing the execution of the process is sent to the management device, so whether or not the command is correctly sent and received with the management device is checked. Since it can be determined, the game value can be appropriately managed so as not to give a disadvantage to the player.

3. 3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by the initial invention 3 The initial invention relates to a game machine that uses electronic information (electronic medals) as a game value (game medium) without using physical medals (as tangible objects). Is.
In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that uses electronic information without using a physical medal as a gaming value is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-062558).
Here, in a gaming machine provided with a main control board that controls the progress of the game and a payout control board that manages the number of credits of the game value, when the player wants to refund the game value, an error occurs. Therefore, it is conceivable that the lending switch operated when lending the game value and the counting switch operated when refunding the game value are operated at the same time. At this time, if the operation of the counting switch is canceled, the operation of the lending switch is accepted, and the game value is lent out, the player may be disadvantaged.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately manage the game value in a game machine that uses electronic information as the game value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a payout control board (100) that manages the number of credits for game value (electronic medals)
The payout control board is electrically connected to the main control board and is electrically connected to an external management device (200) that controls the lending and refund of the game value.
When an event (bet, grant, cancellation) that increases or decreases the number of credits occurs, the main control board requests an operation request command (input request command, payout request command, return request) that requests an increase or decrease in the number of credits. Command) is sent to the payout control board,
When the payout control board receives the calculation request command, the payout control board executes a process of adding or subtracting the number corresponding to the received calculation request command to the number of credits, and the calculation repeat command corresponding to the received calculation request command. (Input repeat command, payout repeat command, return repeat command) is transmitted to the main control board,
When the main control board receives the calculation repeat command, the main control board performs a process according to the occurrence of an event of increasing or decreasing the number of credits (for example, a process of turning on the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, the start switch 41. Processing to make the operation acceptable, processing to display the number of electronic medals granted to the acquired number display LED 78, processing to turn off the 1-bet display LED to 3-bet display LED, processing to make the operation of the start switch 41 unacceptable) Run and
The payout control board can execute the process related to the lending of the game value and the process related to the refund of the game value, and is set to execute the process related to the refund of the game value with priority over the process related to the lending of the game value. It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the original invention, since the processing related to the refund is prioritized over the processing related to the lending of the game value, when the operation related to the lending of the game value and the operation related to the refund are performed at the same time, Since the process related to the refund of the game value can be executed, the game value can be appropriately managed so as not to give a disadvantage to the player.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", etc.).
Conventionally, in a medalless gaming machine, it has been known that information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the rental unit every "300" ms, "60" seconds, and "180" seconds (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019). -See 198565).
It is also known that when the transmission timings of these information overlap, they are transmitted according to the priority.
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, in order to correspond to the cycle of the information to be transmitted, it is necessary to provide a timer (a storage area for storing the timer value) for each information to be transmitted, and there is a problem that the storage capacity is compressed.
In particular, when counting "60" seconds or "180" seconds, the capacity is insufficient in the 1-byte storage area, so 2 bytes or 3 bytes are required for each timer.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to reduce the storage capacity of the timer value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A first storage area (game machine information notification timer A) capable of storing a first count value (count value for measuring "300" ms), and
A second storage area (game machine information notification timer B) capable of storing a second count value (count value for measuring "60" seconds), and
It is provided with at least a third storage area (game machine information notification timer C) capable of storing a third count value (count value for measuring "180" seconds).
The first count value stored in the first storage area can be updated at a predetermined timing (interrupt processing timing, every "1" ms).
Based on the first count value stored in the first storage area, the second count value stored in the second storage area can be updated.
It is characterized in that the third count value stored in the third storage area can be updated based on the second count value stored in the second storage area.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the second storage area and the third storage area.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 5 Same as the original invention 4.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A first storage area (game machine information notification timer A) capable of storing a first count value (count value for measuring "300" ms), and
A second storage area (game machine information notification timer B) capable of storing a second count value (count value for measuring "60" seconds), and
It is provided with at least a third storage area (game machine information notification timer C) capable of storing a third count value (count value for measuring "180" seconds).
The first count value stored in the first storage area can be updated at a predetermined timing (interrupt processing timing, every "1" ms).
Based on the first count value stored in the first storage area, the second count value stored in the second storage area can be updated.
Based on the second count value stored in the second storage area, the third count value stored in the third storage area can be updated.
Based on the first count value stored in the first storage area, it is possible to transmit specific information (game machine information notification including hall control / fraud monitoring information).
The first transmission of specific information after the power is turned on can be executed based on the value of the carry flag when the first count value stored in the first storage area is updated.
The feature is that the second and subsequent transmissions of specific information after the power is turned on can be executed based on the value of the zero flag when the first count value stored in the first storage area is updated. do.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the second storage area and the third storage area.
Further, even when the first storage area is initialized when the power is turned on, it is possible to transmit specific information immediately after the power is turned on.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 6 Same as the original invention 4.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A first storage area (for example, a gaming machine information notification timer A) capable of storing a first count value (for example, a count value for measuring "300" ms) and
It is provided with at least a second storage area (minimum game time) capable of storing a second count value (for example, a count value for measuring "4.1" seconds).
Specific information (game machine information notification) can be transmitted based on the first count value stored in the first storage area.
Based on the second count value stored in the second storage area, it is possible to execute a predetermined control (control of the shortest game time) in the game.
The first storage area can be initialized by turning the power on / off.
The second storage area is characterized in that it is not initialized by turning the power on / off.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, it is possible to transmit specific information according to a predetermined cycle from the time when the power is turned on.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 7 Same as the original invention 4.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A first storage area (game machine information notification timer B) capable of storing the first count value (count value for measuring "60" seconds) and
It is provided with at least a second storage area (game machine information notification timer C) capable of storing a second count value (count value for measuring "180" seconds).
The first information can be transmitted based on the first count value stored in the first storage area.
The second information can be transmitted based on the second count value stored in the second storage area.
There are cases where the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap.
When the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap, the first information can be transmitted at the transmission timing, and the second information can be transmitted at the next transmission timing. It is characterized by.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, even if the transmission timings of the first information and the second information overlap, any one of the information can be transmitted. Further, even if the transmission timings of the first information and the second information overlap, the information that cannot be transmitted can be eliminated.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 8 Same as the original invention 4.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
A first storage area (game machine information notification timer B) capable of storing the first count value (count value for measuring "60" seconds) and
It is provided with at least a second storage area (game machine information notification timer C) capable of storing a second count value (count value for measuring "180" seconds).
The first information can be transmitted based on the first count value stored in the first storage area.
The second information can be transmitted based on the second count value stored in the second storage area.
There are cases where the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap.
It is determined whether or not the transmission timing of the first information has arrived, and when it is determined that the transmission timing of the first information has arrived, the first information can be transmitted, and the transmission timing of the first information has arrived. When it is determined that the information has not been transmitted, it is determined whether or not the timing for transmitting the second information has arrived.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, even if the transmission timings of the first information and the second information overlap, any one of the information can be transmitted. Further, even if the transmission timings of the first information and the second information overlap, the information that cannot be transmitted can be eliminated.
Further, when the first information is transmitted with priority over the second information, when it is determined that the transmission timing of the first information has arrived, whether or not the transmission timing of the second information has arrived is determined. Since the determination process is not required, the process can be simplified and speeded up.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a “managed gaming machine”, an “enclosed gaming machine”, etc.).
Conventionally, in a medalless gaming machine, it has been known that information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the rental unit every "300" ms, "60" seconds, and "180" seconds (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019). -See 198565).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, it is unclear how to determine the information transmission timing.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to accurately determine the timing of transmitting information.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
Equipped with a display means (combination ratio monitor 113) capable of displaying ratio information (advantageous section ratio, etc.) corresponding to the game result.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the ratio is equal to or higher than the threshold value), the display means can execute a blinking display in which the ratio information is repeatedly turned on and off.
It is provided with a first storage area (blinking switching time) that can store count values (“0” to “299”) corresponding to the lighting and extinguishing periods when the ratio information is blinked and displayed.
It is possible to switch between lighting and extinguishing based on the value of the carry flag when the count value stored in the first storage area is updated.
It is equipped with a second storage area (game machine information notification timer A) that can store the count value corresponding to the transmission timing of specific information (game machine information notification including hall control / fraud monitoring information).
It is characterized in that specific information can be transmitted based on the value of the carry flag or the value of the zero flag when the count value of the second storage area is updated.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, it is possible to accurately transmit specific information.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", etc.).
Conventionally, in a medalless gaming machine, it has been known that information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the rental unit every "300" ms, "60" seconds, and "180" seconds (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019). -See 198565).
It is also known that when the transmission timings of these information overlap, they are transmitted according to the priority.
However, the above-mentioned conventional technique has a problem that the latest information cannot be transmitted if the transmission timings of a plurality of pieces of information overlap and the transmission timings are delayed.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to transmit the latest information even if the transmission timings of a plurality of pieces of information overlap.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A first storage area (game machine information notification timer B) capable of storing a count value corresponding to a transmission timing of the first information (game machine information notification including game machine installation information), and
It is provided with at least a second storage area (game machine information notification timer C) capable of storing a count value corresponding to the transmission timing of the second information (game machine information notification including game machine performance information).
There are cases where the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap.
When the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap, the first information can be transmitted, and after the first information is transmitted, when the next transmission timing arrives, the first information is transmitted. 2 information can be sent,
When the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap, and the second information is transmitted after the first information is transmitted, it is based on the situation at the transmission timing of the second information. It is characterized in that the second information can be transmitted.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, it is possible to transmit any one piece of information even if the transmission timings of a plurality of pieces of information overlap. Further, even if the transmission timings of a plurality of pieces of information overlap, it is possible to eliminate the information that cannot be transmitted.
Further, even when the information transmission timing is delayed, the latest information can be transmitted.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 11 Same as the initial invention 10.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A first storage area (game machine information notification timer A) capable of storing a count value corresponding to a transmission timing of the first information (game machine information notification including hall control / fraud monitoring information), and
A second storage area (game machine information notification timer B) capable of storing a count value corresponding to a transmission timing of the second information (game machine information notification including game machine installation information), and
It is provided with at least a third storage area (game machine information notification timer C) capable of storing a count value corresponding to the transmission timing of the third information (game machine information notification including game machine performance information).
There are cases where the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap.
When the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap, the second information can be transmitted, and after the second information is transmitted, when the next transmission timing arrives, the second information is transmitted. 1 information can be sent,
When the transmission timing of the first information and the transmission timing of the second information overlap, and the first information is transmitted after the second information is transmitted, it is based on the situation at the transmission timing of the first information. The first information can be sent,
There are cases where the transmission timing of the second information and the transmission timing of the third information overlap.
When the transmission timing of the second information and the transmission timing of the third information overlap, the second information can be transmitted, and after the second information is transmitted, when the next transmission timing arrives, the second information is transmitted. 3 information can be sent,
When the second information transmission timing and the third information transmission timing overlap, and the third information is transmitted after the second information is transmitted, it is based on the situation at the third information transmission timing. It is characterized in that a third piece of information can be transmitted.
(C) Effect of the original invention 11 Same as the original invention 10.

12. Initial invention 12
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 12 Same as the original invention 10.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A first storage area (game machine information notification timer A) capable of storing a count value corresponding to a transmission timing of the first information (game machine information notification including hall control / fraud monitoring information), and
A second storage area (game machine information notification timer B) capable of storing a count value corresponding to a transmission timing of the second information (game machine information notification including game machine installation information), and
It is provided with at least a third storage area (game machine information notification timer C) capable of storing a count value corresponding to the transmission timing of the third information (game machine information notification including game machine performance information).
There is a case where the transmission timing of the first information, the transmission timing of the second information, and the transmission timing of the third information overlap.
When the transmission timing of the first information, the transmission timing of the second information, and the transmission timing of the third information overlap, the second information can be transmitted, and after the second information is transmitted, the next When the transmission timing arrives, the third information can be transmitted, and after the third information is transmitted, the first information can be transmitted when the next transmission timing arrives.
When the transmission timing of the first information, the transmission timing of the second information, and the transmission timing of the third information overlap, and the first information is transmitted after the second information and the third information are transmitted, the first information is transmitted. It is characterized in that the first information can be transmitted based on the situation at the transmission timing of the first information.
(C) Effect of the original invention 12 Same as the original invention 10.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 The initial invention relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a “managed gaming machine”, an “enclosed gaming machine”, etc.).
Conventionally, medalless gaming machines have been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-198565).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, the processing when the counting switch is operated is unknown.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to efficiently execute the process when the counting switch is operated.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
A game medium number control board (100) having a game medium number storage area capable of storing the number of game media, and a game medium number control board (100).
It is equipped with a counting switch (47) that is operated when refunding the game media stored in the game medium number control board.
The game medium number control board determines whether or not the counting switch has been operated, and when it is determined that the counting switch has been operated, determines the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage area. When it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage area is not "0", the counting process can be executed.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, it is possible to efficiently execute the processing when the counting switch is operated, and to speed up the processing.

10 Slot machine, game machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 21 Directive lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 46 Cancel switch, checkout switch 47 Counting switch 50 Main control board (main control means), main control board (main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 (1st main control) RWM
53a Bet number storage means 53b Grant number storage means 54 (1st main control) ROM
55 Main CPU, (1st main control) CPU
61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Granting means 73 Set value display means 76 Credit number display LED
77 Bet number display unit 78 Acquisition number display LED, grant number display unit 80 Sub control board (sub control means), sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 (Secondary control) RWM
84 (Secondary control) ROM
85 sub CPU, (sub control) CPU
91 Production output control means 100 Payout control board (credit number management board), game medium number control board 101 Input port 102 Output port 103 (second main control) RWM
103a Number of game media storage means 104 (second main control) ROM
105 Credit number management CPU, (second main control) CPU
106 Capacitor 107 Capacitor A
108 Capacitor B
111 Credit number management means 112 Total number of game media clear switch 113 Role ratio monitor 120 Number of game media display board 121 Number of game media display unit 130 Connection terminal board 150 Power supply board 151 Capacitor 161 Harness A
162 Harness B
163 Harness C
164 Harness D
165 Harness E
166 Harness F
167 Harness G
168 Harness H
190 External centralized terminal board 200 Management device (CR unit), lending unit 201 Banknote slot 202 Lending switch 203 Return switch 204 Frequency display 205 Card reader / writer 300 Hall computer 400 Management computer

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown).
The present invention
It is configured so that the first gaming machine information (hall control / fraud monitoring information) can be transmitted to the outside (rental unit 200) every first period (300 ms).
It is configured so that the second gaming machine information (game machine installation information) can be transmitted to the outside (rental unit 200) every second period (60 seconds).
The first period (300 ms) is configured to be shorter than the second period (60 seconds).
The second period is configured to be a multiple of the first period.
At the timing of transmitting the second gaming machine information, the second gaming machine information can be transmitted with priority over the first gaming machine information, and at the timing of transmitting the second gaming machine information, the first gaming machine information. Is configured not to send.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown).
The present invention
It is configured so that the first gaming machine information (hall control / fraud monitoring information) can be transmitted to the outside (rental unit 200) every first period (300 ms).
It is configured so that the second gaming machine information (game machine installation information) can be transmitted to the outside (rental unit 200) every second period (60 seconds).
The third gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) is configured to be able to be transmitted to the outside every third period (180 seconds).
The first period (300 ms) is configured to be shorter than the second period (60 seconds).
The second period is configured to be shorter than the third period (180 seconds).
The second period is configured to be a multiple of the first period.
The third period is configured to be a multiple of the second period.
At the timing of transmitting the second gaming machine information, the second gaming machine information can be transmitted.
When the second gaming machine information is transmitted at the timing of transmitting the second gaming machine information, the first gaming machine information is not transmitted at that timing.
When the second gaming machine information is transmitted at the timing of transmitting the second gaming machine information, the third gaming machine information is not transmitted at the timing.
When the transmission timings of the second gaming machine information and the third gaming machine information overlap and the second gaming machine information is transmitted, the first period has elapsed from the transmission timing of the second gaming machine information. It is configured so that sometimes the third gaming machine information can be transmitted.

Claims (1)

The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
A game medium number control board having a game medium number storage area capable of storing the number of game media,
The number of game media is equipped with a counting switch that is operated when refunding the game media stored on the control board.
The game medium number control board determines whether or not the counting switch has been operated, and when it is determined that the counting switch has been operated, determines the number of gaming media stored in the game medium number storage area. , A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the number of gaming media stored in the game medium number storage area is not "0", counting processing can be executed.

Images